SDH Configuration

286
ZXONM E300 Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Operation Manual (Volume II) SDH Network Element Operations Version 3.18 ZTE CORPORATION ZTE Plaza, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park, Nanshan District, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057 Tel: (86) 755 26771900 800-9830-9830 Fax: (86) 755 26772236 URL: http://support.zte.com.cn E-mail: [email protected]

Transcript of SDH Configuration

Page 1: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network

Operation Manual(Volume II) SDH Network Element Operations

Version 3.18

ZTE CORPORATION ZTE Plaza, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park, Nanshan District, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057 Tel: (86) 755 26771900 800-9830-9830 Fax: (86) 755 26772236 URL: http://support.zte.com.cn E-mail: [email protected]

Page 2: SDH Configuration

LEGAL INFORMATION

Copyright © 2006 ZTE CORPORATION.

The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by contractual confidentiality obligations.

All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE CORPORATION or of their respective owners.

This document is provided “as is”, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on the information contained herein.

ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter herein.

ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice.

Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information.

The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.

Revision History

Date Revision No. Serial No. Description

July 25, 2007 R1.0 sjzl20071692 First version

Page 3: SDH Configuration

ZTE CORPORATION Values Your Comments & Suggestions! Your opinion is of great value and will help us improve the quality of our product documentation and offer better services to our customers.

Please fax to: (86) 755-26772236; or mail to Publications R&D Department, ZTE CORPORATION, ZTE Plaza, A Wing, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057.

Thank you for your cooperation!

Document Name

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Operation Manual (Volume II) SDH Network Element Operations

Product Version V3.18 Document

Revision Number R1.0

Equipment Installation Date

Presentation: (Introductions, Procedures, Illustrations, Completeness, Level of Detail, Organization, Appearance)

Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A

Accessibility: (Contents, Index, Headings, Numbering, Glossary)

Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A

Your evaluation of this documentation

Intelligibility: (Language, Vocabulary, Readability & Clarity, Technical Accuracy, Content)

Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A

Your suggestions for improvement of this documentation

Please check the suggestions which you feel can improve this documentation: Improve the overview/introduction Make it more concise/brief

Improve the Contents Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials

Improve the organization Add more troubleshooting information

Include more figures Make it less technical

Add more examples Add more/better quick reference aids

Add more detail Improve the index

Other suggestions

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

# Please feel free to write any comments on an attached sheet.

If you wish to be contacted regarding your comments, please complete the following:

Name Company

Postcode Address

Telephone E-mail

Page 4: SDH Configuration

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 5: SDH Configuration

Contents

About this Manual .......................................................................................i Purpose .................................................................................................................. i Intended Audience................................................................................................... i Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge............................................................................... i What in This Manual ................................................................................................ i Related Documentation........................................................................................... ii Conventions...........................................................................................................iii How to Get in Touch ...............................................................................................v

Customer Support...................................................................................................................v Documentation Support...........................................................................................................v

PART A............................................................................................ 1

Configuration Operations...........................................................................1

Chapter 1........................................................................................ 3

Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration..................................3 Configuration Flow..................................................................................................3 Configuration Example............................................................................................5

Networking Configuration ........................................................................................................5 Networking Analysis and Service Configuration.........................................................................6 Connecting EMS and NE ..........................................................................................................7 Creating NE.............................................................................................................................8 Installing Board.....................................................................................................................10 Establishing Connection.........................................................................................................14 Configuring Two-fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring ..........................................................................17 Configuring Four-fiber 1+1 MSP Link......................................................................................22 Configuring Service ...............................................................................................................24 Configuring Clock Source.......................................................................................................28 Configuring the Orderwire......................................................................................................30 Modifying the NE State ..........................................................................................................33 Downloading NE Database.....................................................................................................34

Chapter 2......................................................................................37

Circuit Service Configuration .................................................................. 37

Page 6: SDH Configuration

Configuration Flow................................................................................................37 Service Layer Circuit..............................................................................................................38 PDH Circuit ...........................................................................................................................39 Broadcast Circuit ...................................................................................................................40 Concatenation Circuit.............................................................................................................42 Data Service Circuit...............................................................................................................43

Configuring PDH Circuit.........................................................................................44

Chapter 3......................................................................................49

Ethernet Service Configuration............................................................... 49 Configuration of Ethernet Service Transparent Transmission.....................................49

Configuring TGEB Board ........................................................................................................51 Configuring TFE Board...........................................................................................................53

Configuration of Smart Ethernet Board ...................................................................58 Configuring SFE/SGE Series Boards........................................................................................58 Configuring SE Boards...........................................................................................................68

Configuration of RPR Ethernet Service ....................................................................85 Configuring RSEA Board ........................................................................................................86 Configuring RSEB-RPR Board.................................................................................................94 Configuring RSEB-EOS Board.................................................................................................98

Configuring MPLS Ethernet Service....................................................................... 100 Configuring EPL Service.......................................................................................................101 Configuring EVPL Service.....................................................................................................110 Configuring EVPLAN Service.................................................................................................118

VLAN Configuration Example ............................................................................... 123 Networking Analysis and Board Configuration .......................................................................124 Configuring Card Property....................................................................................................125 Establishing Connection.......................................................................................................130 Creating User and VLAN ......................................................................................................130 Setting VLAN.......................................................................................................................130 Configuring Timeslot............................................................................................................131

Chapter 4....................................................................................133

ATM Service Configuration.................................................................... 133

Configuration Flow.............................................................................................. 133 Configuration Example........................................................................................ 137

Networking Analysis and Card Configuration.........................................................................138 Configuring Port ..................................................................................................................140 Establishing Connection.......................................................................................................141 Establishing PVC Connection ................................................................................................141 Configuring Passed-by NEs ..................................................................................................144

Chapter 5....................................................................................145

Page 7: SDH Configuration

About this Manual

Common SDH Management Operations............................................... 145

Setting Misconnection Resistance......................................................................... 145 Setting APS Byte ................................................................................................ 147 Configuring DCC................................................................................................. 149 Configuring Static Route...................................................................................... 152 Configuring Gateway NE...................................................................................... 154 Setting Managing Capacity Expansion................................................................... 157 Setting Circuit Auto Search.................................................................................. 163 Setting Circuit Query........................................................................................... 163 Setting Broadcast Circuit Query ........................................................................... 165 Setting NE Auto Search....................................................................................... 166 Setting Card Auto Search .................................................................................... 169

PART B........................................................................................171

Operations during Running................................................................... 171

Chapter 6....................................................................................173

Alarm Management............................................................................... 173

Alarm Configuration............................................................................................ 173 Setting Alarm Mask .............................................................................................................173 Setting Alarm Severity.........................................................................................................175 Setting Alarm Standby.........................................................................................................176 Setting Alarm Audible..........................................................................................................177 Setting Alarm Audio.............................................................................................................178 Setting Alarm Color .............................................................................................................179 Setting Alarm Prompt..........................................................................................................179 Setting Alarm Filter..............................................................................................................180 Setting Agent External Alarm...............................................................................................182 Setting Alarm Auto Acknowledgement Time .........................................................................183 Setting Alarm Diagnose Rule................................................................................................183 Setting Email or Short Message Output of Alarm...................................................................184 Detecting Free AU ...............................................................................................................185

Alarm Query ...................................................................................................... 186 Querying Current Alarms.....................................................................................................186 Querying History Alarms......................................................................................................191 Querying Locked Alarms......................................................................................................193 Querying Protection Switching Events...................................................................................194 Querying Over Threshold Alarms..........................................................................................195 Analyzing Circuit Alarm Correlativity.....................................................................................196

Chapter 7....................................................................................199

Performance Management.................................................................... 199

Page 8: SDH Configuration

Performance Configuration .................................................................................. 199 Setting Digital Performance Threshold..................................................................................199 Setting Analog Performance Threshold .................................................................................200 Resetting Performance Register ...........................................................................................201 Restraining Zero Performance..............................................................................................202 Masking Performance ..........................................................................................................203 Setting Performance Collection Time ....................................................................................204 Setting SNC Switching.........................................................................................................205 Setting Data Flow Supervision Parameter .............................................................................207

Performance Query............................................................................................. 208 Querying Current Performance.............................................................................................208 Querying History Performance .............................................................................................209 Setting Performance Statistics..............................................................................................211 Setting Performance Prediction ............................................................................................212 Setting Performance Task Management ...............................................................................213

State Management ............................................................................................. 215 Querying Card Running State...............................................................................................215 Querying History Running State ...........................................................................................215 Setting State Mask ..............................................................................................................216 Setting State Threshold .......................................................................................................216

Chapter 8....................................................................................219

Maintenance Operations....................................................................... 219

Setting Loopback................................................................................................ 219 Inserting Alarms................................................................................................. 222 Inserting Bit Error............................................................................................... 224 Setting Protection Switching ................................................................................ 226 Setting APS Operation of MSP.............................................................................. 227 Resetting Cards.................................................................................................. 228 Querying Maintenance State................................................................................ 229 Setting Forced State of CS Card........................................................................... 229 Setting Main/Standby NCP Switching.................................................................... 230 Orienting OW Error ............................................................................................. 231 Testing Communication....................................................................................... 232 Ethernet Maintenance ......................................................................................... 233

Querying VLAN Bridge Running State...................................................................................233 Querying Running State of Physical Port ...............................................................................233 Querying Multicast State......................................................................................................234 Querying LCAS Running State of Virtual Concatenation .........................................................234 Querying RPR Ring Topology................................................................................................235 Querying RPR Ring Topology State.......................................................................................235

Page 9: SDH Configuration

About this Manual

Querying RPR Physical Port Running State............................................................................236 Querying MSTP Universal.....................................................................................................237 Setting Port Mirroring ..........................................................................................................237 Setting Data Board Ping Function.........................................................................................238

Querying Card Version ........................................................................................ 239 Setting Time Management................................................................................... 241 Configuring NE Synchronous Time ....................................................................... 242

PART C........................................................................................245

System Operations................................................................................ 245

Chapter 9....................................................................................247

System Management ............................................................................ 247

Querying NCP Security Log.................................................................................. 247 NCP Data Management ....................................................................................... 248

Downloading Database........................................................................................................248 Uploading Database ............................................................................................................248 Uploading and Comparing Database.....................................................................................249 Setting Board Upload and Compare......................................................................................250 Uploading and Comparing Database Automatically................................................................251 Synchronizing NE Data into DB ............................................................................................252 Clearing NCP Database........................................................................................................252

Report Management ........................................................................................... 253 Configuring Report ..............................................................................................................253 Configuring Current Alarm PSE Report..................................................................................254 Configuring History Alarm Performance PSE Report...............................................................255 Configuring Net Path Report.................................................................................................257

Abbreviations .............................................................................261

Figures........................................................................................265

Tables .........................................................................................269

Page 10: SDH Configuration

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 11: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION i

About this Manual

Purpose This manual provides the information about configurations, basic operations of ZXONM E300.

Intended Audience This manual is intended for engineers and technicians who perform activities on ZTE’s transmission equipment via ZXONM E300.

Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge To use this manual effectively, users should have a general understanding of optical transmission technology and network management system. Familiarity with the following is helpful:

System and various components of transmission equipment of ZTE

User interfaces of ZXONM E300

Basic operations of ZXONM E300

What in This Manual The operation manual is the Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Operation Manual (Volume II) SDH Network Element Operations. It consists of the following parts:

Chapter Description

PART A Configuration Operations

Describes the configuration flow and detailed steps with a networking example.

PART B Running Operations Describes alarm, performance, and maintenance operations frequently used during the running of ZXONM E300.

PART C System Operations Describes some common system operations, including security management, NCP data management, and report management.

Page 12: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

ii Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Related Documentation Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network (ZXONM E300 in short) is a set of NE/subnet layer network management system based on Windows 2000 and Unix platforms. On the basis of guaranteeing hardware functions of transmission equipment, it manages and controls system NEs and regional networks, providing such functions as system management, configuration management, performance management, fault management, security management, and maintenance management.

1. Management scope of ZXONM E300 (V3.18)

SDH equipment: ZXMP S390, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S360, ZXMP S320, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S100, ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325

DWDM equipment: ZXWM-32 (V1.1), ZXWM M900, ZXMP M800

CWDM equipment: ZXMP M600

PCM equipment: ZXMP P210, ZXMP P220, ZXMP P230, ZXMP P240

2. Manual suite

Manual Name Function

Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Installation Manual

It describes the basic knowledge and installation process of ZXONM E300.

Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Interface Manual

It is an electrical manual, which describes the operations of ZXONM E300 client/ server interfaces.

Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Operation Manual

It includes several volumes which describe the operations commonly used in ZXONM E300 in details.

Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network LCT User’s Manual

It describes the installation and configuration of the ZXONM E300 LCT (Local Craft/maintenance Terminal).

Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Maintenance Manual

It describes the maintenance knowledge of ZXONM E300.

Page 13: SDH Configuration

About this Manual

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION iii

Conventions Typographical Conventions

ZTE documents employ the following typographical conventions.

T AB L E 1 TY P O G R AP H I C AL C O N V E N T I O N S

Typeface Meaning

Italics References to other guides and documents.

“Quotes” Links on screens.

Bold Menus, menu options, input fields, radio button names, check boxes, drop-down lists, dialog box names, window names

CAPS Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens and company name.

Constant width Text that you type, program code, files and directory names, and function names

[ ] Optional parameters

{ } Mandatory parameters

| Select one of the parameters that are delimited by it

Note: Provides additional information about a certain topic.

Checkpoint: Indicates that a particular step needs to be checked before proceeding further.

Tip: Indicates a suggestion or hint to make things easier or more productive for the reader.

Mouse Operation Conventions

T AB L E 2 M O U S E OP E R AT I O N C O N V E N T I O N S

Typeface Meaning

Click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) once.

Double-click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) twice.

Right-click Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the right mouse button) once.

Drag Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and moving the mouse.

Page 14: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

iv Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Safety Signs

T AB L E 3 S AF E T Y S I G N S

Safety Signs Meaning

Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This signal word should be limited to only extreme situations.

Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

Erosion: Beware of erosion.

Electric shock: There is a risk of electric shock.

Electrostatic: The device may be sensitive to static electricity.

Microwave: Beware of strong electromagnetic field.

Laser: Beware of strong laser beam.

No flammables: No flammables can be stored.

No touching: Do not touch.

No smoking: Smoking is forbidden.

Other Convention

In this manual, both the words “card” and “board” are used to refer to circuit board.

Page 15: SDH Configuration

About this Manual

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION v

How to Get in Touch The following sections provide information on how to obtain support for the documentation and the software.

Customer Support If you have problems, questions, comments, or suggestions regarding your product, contact us by e-mail at [email protected]. You can also call our customer support center at (86) 755 26771900 and (86) 800-9830-9830.

Documentation Support ZTE welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document. For further questions, comments, or suggestions on the documentation, you can contact us by e-mail at [email protected]; or you can fax your comments and suggestions to (86) 755 26772236. You can also explore our website at http://support.zte.com.cn, which contains various interesting subjects like documentation, knowledge base, forum and service request.

Page 16: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

vi Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 17: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 1

PART A Configuration Operations

In this part, you will get a comprehensive understanding about the configuration operations of ZXONM E300.

PART A includes the following five chapters:

Chapter 1 Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

This chapter describes the networking flow of the SDH service with a networking example, helping users understand the whole process of “Networking Analysis -> Configuration -> Site Commissioning”.

Chapter 2 Circuit Service Configuration

This chapter describes the configuration flows of various circuits. In addition, this chapter illustrates the creation of the PDH circuit with a networking example.

Chapter 3 Ethernet Service Configuration

This chapter describes the configuration flows of all kinds of Ethernet services. In addition, this chapter illustrates the creation of the VLAN with a networking example.

Chapter 4 ATM Service Configuration

This chapter describes the configuration flow of the ATM service. In addition, this chapter illustrates the creation of the ATM service with a networking example.

Chapter 5 Common SDH Management Operations

This chapter describes common SDH NE management functions.

Page 18: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 19: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 3

C h a p t e r 1

Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

This chapter describes the configuration flow of establishing a transmission network with ZXONM E300. In addition, an example of SDH service networking is included to describe the operation steps and methods.

Configuration Flow The networking configuration with ZXONM E300 has two typical flows according to whether the NEs are online or offline.

Note:

Online status indicates that the NE configuration commands are sent at real-time to the NCP board, and then are forwarded to the corresponding board by NCP board.

Offline status indicates that the NE configuration commands are only saved in the EMS database and are not sent to the NCP board, since the NE is offline.

Networking flow of online NEs

The networking flow of online NEs is listed in Table 4.

T AB L E 4 N E T W O R K I N G FL O W O F ON L I N E NE S

Step Description Menu

1 Create online NEs Device Config -> Create NE (select the NeState as “Online”)

2 Install the boards Device Config -> NE Config -> Open NE

3 Connect NEs Device Config -> Common Management -> Link Management

4 Configure timeslots Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config

Page 20: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

4 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Step Description Menu

5 Configure clock sources

Device Config -> SDH Management -> Clock Source

6 Configure orderwire services

Device Config -> Common Management -> Order Wire

……

N Extract the NCP time Maintenance -> Time Management

Networking flow of offline NEs

The networking flow of offline NEs is listed in Table 5.

T AB L E 5 N E T W O R K I N G FL O W O F OF F L I N E NE S

Step Description Menu

1 Create offline NEs Device Config -> Create NE (select the NeState as “Offline”)

2 Install the boards Device Config -> NE Config -> Open NE

3 Connect NEs Device Config -> Common Management -> Link Management

4 Configure timeslots Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config

5 Configure clock sources Device Config -> SDH Management -> Clock Source

6 Configure orderwire services

Device Config -> Common Management -> Order Wire

……

N-2 Modify NE status to “Online” Device Config -> NE Config -> NE Property

N-1 Download NE data System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Download

N Extract the NCP time Maintenance -> Time Management

Note: Some other configurations may need to be performed in the EMS according to actual networking requirement and equipment type:

If the network needs MS protection, configure MS protection before configuring timeslots.

If the network needs Ethernet or ATM service, configure them. For detailed configuration, refer to Chapter 3 and Chapter 4.

If the equipment has special requirement for configuration, e.g. ZXMP S330 needs 1:N protection for boards, make corresponding configurations in EMS via selecting Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Setting 1:N Card Switching.

If EMS manages the transmission equipment by Data Communication Network (DCN), the gateway NE can be employed to establish the communication relationship between EMS and the managed equipment. For detailed operations, refer to Configure Gateway NE in Chapter 5.

Page 21: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 5

Configuration Example In this section, you will learn about the configuration of traditional SDH services with a networking example for offline network elements.

Networking Configuration Suppose there are six NEs: A, B, C, D, E and F. The network consisting of them is illustrated in Figure 1.

F I G U R E 1 NE T W O R K I N G D I AG R AM

Service requirements are listed as follows:

As the access network element and network head, NE A is accessed to the EMS terminal (ZXONM E300), providing the clock for the whole network.

Traffic assignments:

Between NE A and NE B: eight STM-1 optical signal services

Between NE A and NE C: eight STM-1 optical signal services

Between NE A and NE D: eight STM-1 optical signal services

Between NE E and NE F: fifty 2 M bidirectional services

Orderwire phone is needed among all the NEs;

NE A, B, C and D form a two-fiber bidirectional MS protection ring;

NE D and E form a four-fiber 1+1 MS protection link.

Page 22: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

6 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Networking Analysis and Service Configuration According to the network transmission rate presented above, determine the type of transmission equipment as listed in Table 6.

T AB L E 6 TY P E O F E Q U I P M E N T AN D S E R V I C E B O AR D S

NE Equipment Type

A, B, C, D ZXMP S390

E ZXMP S380

F ZXMP S360

Then determine the type and quantity of all boards in each NE according to service requirements and the capacity of service boards.

Table 7, Table 8, and Table 9 respectively list the board configurations of ZXMP S390, ZXMP S380, and ZXMP S360.

T AB L E 7 B O A R D C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F ZXMP S390 (NE A, B , C , AN D D)

Board Board Quantity

Type Function NE A NE B NE C NE D

NCP Controls the NE 1 1 1 1

SC Assigns the clock, supports 1+1 warm backup 2 2 2 2

OW Provides the orderwire phone function 1 1 1 1

CSE Performs the space-division cross-connect, supports 1+1 warm backup 2 2 2 2

OL64 Provides 10 Gbit/s optical signal 2 2 2 2

OL16 Provides 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal - - 1 2

OL1×8 Provides STM-1 optical signal 3 1 1 1

T AB L E 8 B O A R D C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F ZXMP S380 (NE E)

Board Board Quantity

Type Function NE E

NCP Controls the NE 1

SC Assigns the clock, supports 1+1 warm backup 2

OW Provides the orderwire phone function 1

CSA Performs the space-division cross-connect, supports 1+1 warm backup 2

OL16 Provides 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal 2

ET1 Provides 2 Mbit/s service 1

Page 23: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 7

T AB L E 9 B O A R D C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F ZXMP S360 (NE F)

Board Board Quantity

Type Function NE F

NCP Controls the NE 1

SC Assigns the clock, supports 1+1 warm backup 2

OW Provides the orderwire phone function 1

CSA Performs the space-division cross-connect, supports 1+1 warm backup 2

OI16 1

LP16

One OI16 board works together with two LP16 boards to provide one channel of 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal 2

EP1A Provides 2 Mbit/s service 1

Based on the networking requirement, make out the IP addresses of each NE and the EMS computer listed in Table 10.

T AB L E 10 L A Y O U T O F IP AD D R E S S F O R E AC H NE AN D T H E EMS C O M P U T E R

Equipment IP Address Mask

NE A 193.55.1.18 255.255.255.0

NE B 193.55.2.18 255.255.255.0

NE C 193.55.3.18 255.255.255.0

NE D 193.55.4.18 255.255.255.0

NE E 193.55.5.18 255.255.255.0

NE F 193.55.6.18 255.255.255.0

EMS computer 193.55.1.5 255.255.255.0

Since NE A is connected with the EMS computer directly, IP address of the EMS computer should be in the network segment same with that of NE A.

Connecting EMS and NE [Purpose]

Establish the communication between EMS and NE.

[Steps]

1. Connect the network port of EMS computer with the Qx port which lies in the interface area of NE A.

2. Modify the IP address, mask and gateway address of EMS computer as 193.55.1.5, 255.255.255.0, 193.55.1.18 respectively.

3. Add the routing on the EMS computer in order to make the computer access other NEs.

i. Click Start -> Run in the EMS computer and go to Run dialog box.

Page 24: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

8 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

ii. Input cmd in the Run dialog box and go to cmd Window.

iii. Input following commands in the cmd Window to add the routing information in order to access other NEs.

route add 193.55.2.0 mask 255.255.255.0 193.55.1.18

route add 193.55.3.0 mask 255.255.255.0 193.55.1.18

route add 193.55.4.0 mask 255.255.255.0 193.55.1.18

route add 193.55.5.0 mask 255.255.255.0 193.55.1.18

route add 193.55.6.0 mask 255.255.255.0 193.55.1.18

Cautions: After EMS computer is rebooted, the routings added above will be lost. If the permanent routings are expected in the computer, the command of route add-p should be used instead of route add .

[Result]

After creating the NE according to the steps described in Creating NE later, Ping NE’s IP on the EMS computer, then the NE can be pinged through.

Creating NE [Purpose]

Create NE A, B, C, D, E, and F.

[Steps]

Select the menu item Device Config -> Create NE in the main view of the client operation window, and the Create NE dialog box pops up.

In the dialog box, enter or select the configuration information as listed in Table 11 into corresponding items.

T AB L E 11 NE I N F O R M AT I O N

NE Parameter

A B C D E F

NE Name A B C D E F

NE ID 51 52 53 54 55 56

NE Address 193.55.1.18 193.55.2.18 193.55.3.18 193.55.4.18 193.55.5.18 193.55.6.18

System Type ZXMP S380/S90

ZXMP S380/S390

ZXMP S380/S390

ZXMP S380/S390

ZXMP S380/S390 ZXMP S360

Device Type ZXMP S390 ZXMP S390 ZXMP S390 ZXMP S390 ZXMP S380 ZXMP S360

NE Type ADM&REG ADM&REG ADM&REG ADM&REG TM TM

Speed STM-64 STM-64 STM-64 STM-64 STM-16 STM-16

Page 25: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 9

NE Parameter

A B C D E F

NeState Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline

Auto-Link Auto-Link Auto-Link Auto-Link Auto-Link Auto-Link Auto-Link

Set Shelf Main shelf Main shelf Main shelf Main shelf Main shelf Main shelf

No extended subrack is configured in this project. Therefore, use the default system configuration.

Login password for NE can be set if necessary.

For those parameters unlisted in this table such as Collect History Performance Periodically and Auto Synchronize Time, just keep the default settings.

Note: NE address and NE ID should be same with the configurations in NCP. The configurations of the address and ID of NCP board refer to Unitrans ZXONM E300(V3.18) Unified EMS SNMS of Optical Network Operation Manual(Volume IV) Agent Configuration.

For example, to create NE A, Figure 2 shows the Create NE dialog box.

F I G U R E 2 CR E AT E NE D I AL O G B O X (F O R NE A)

[Result]

After inputting all the parameters about the NE, click the Apply button and the NE is created successfully. The icon of NE A is displayed in the client operation window, as shown in Figure 3.

Page 26: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

10 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 3 CL I E N T OP E R AT I O N W I N D O W W I T H NE A C R E AT E D

Create other NEs with the same procedures.

Check the information of the NE created in the NE Property dialog box and make sure the parameters are same as those you have entered.

Tip:

To access the NE Property dialog box, select the NE in the client operation window, and then perform any of the following operations:

Select the menu item Device Config -> NE Config -> NE Property;

Click the button on the toolbar;

Right-click the NE icon and select the NE Property menu item in the pop-up shortcut menu.

Installing Board [Purpose]

Install boards for each NE according to Table 7, Table 8 and Table 9.

[Steps]

Double-click the NE icon in the topology to pop up Card Management dialog box, as shown in Figure 4.

Page 27: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 11

F I G U R E 4 C AR D M AN AG E M E N T D I AL O G B O X

Note: Select the Presetting check box before installing CS board, as shown in Figure 4. And then select the board type and time division module (TCS module) in the advanced property dialog box according to Table 8 and Table 9.

[Result]

After installation, double-click the NE icon again and chech whether the right boards are installed in the simulative rack in the Card Management dialog box.

The simulative rack of NE A is shown in Figure 5.

Page 28: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

12 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 5 S I M U L AT I V E R AC K O F NE A

The simulative rack of NE B is shown in Figure 6.

F I G U R E 6 S I M U L AT I V E R AC K O F NE B

The simulative rack of NE C is shown in Figure 7.

Page 29: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 13

F I G U R E 7 S I M U L AT I V E R AC K O F NE C

The simulative rack of NE D is shown in Figure 8.

F I G U R E 8 S I M U L AT I V E R AC K O F NE D

The simulative rack of NE E is shown in Figure 9.

Page 30: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

14 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 9 S I M U L AT I V E R AC K O F NE E

The simulative rack of NE F is shown in Figure 10.

F I G U R E 10 S I M U L AT I V E R A C K O F NE F

Establishing Connection [Purpose]

Establish optical links between NEs.

Page 31: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 15

[Steps]

1. Select all the NEs in the client operation window, and select the menu item Device Config -> Common Management -> Link Management to pop up Link Management dialog box, as shown in Figure 11.

F I G U R E 11 L I N K M AN AG E M E N T D I AL O G B O X (W I T H O U T OP T I C AL L I N K S )

2. In the Link Management dialog box, establish optical links according to the connection relations listed in Table 12.

T AB L E 12 L I N K C O N F I G U R AT I O N

SN Start End Destination End Connection Type

1 NE A: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1 NE B: OL64[1-1-3], Port 1

Bidirectional optical link

2 NE B: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1 NE C: OL64[1-1-3], Port 1

Bidirectional optical link

3 NE C: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1 NE D: OL64[1-1-3], Port 1

Bidirectional optical link

4 NE D: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1 NE A: OL64[1-1-3], Port 1

Bidirectional optical link

NE D: OL16[1-1-1], Port 1 NE E: OL16[1-1-3], Port 1

Bidirectional optical link

5

NE D: OL16[1-1-2], Port 1 NE E: OL16[1-1-12], Port 1

Bidirectional optical link

6 NE C: OL16[1-1-1], Port 1 NE F: OI16[1-1-5], Port 1

Bidirectional optical link

Page 32: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

16 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

[Result]

1. After establishing all optical links, there should be green lines between NE icons in the topology, as shown in Figure 12.

F I G U R E 12 TO P O L O G Y W I T H OP T I C AL L I N K S

2. Select all the NEs and click the menu item Device Config -> Common Management -> Link Management in the client operation window. Check optical links in the pop-up Link Management dialog box as shown in Figure 13.

Page 33: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 17

F I G U R E 13 L I N K D I AL O G B O X (W I T H E S T AB L I S H E D OP T I C AL L I N K S )

Configuring Two-fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring [Purpose]

Configure two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

[Steps]

1. Select the NEs to be configured with MSP in the client operation window, and select the menu item Device Config -> Common Management -> MS Protection to pop up the MS Protection Config dialog box, as shown in Figure 14.

Page 34: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

18 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 14 MS P R O T E C T I O N C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

2. Configure the MSP group

i. Click New.. button in the MS Protection Config dialog box to pop up MS Group Config dialog box as shown in Figure 15.

F I G U R E 15 MS GR O U P C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

ii. Set the parameters of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP group according to Table 13.

Page 35: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 19

T AB L E 13 C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F TW O -F I B E R B I D I R E C T I O N AL MSP GR O U P

Item Configuration

MS Group ID 1

MS Group Name 1

MS Group Type SDH Two-Fiber Bi-Dir MS ring (No Extra Service)

iii. Click the OK button in the MS Group Config dialog box to return to the MS Protection Config dialog box as shown in Figure 16, where the MS Group List displays the configured two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

F I G U R E 16 MS P R O T E C T I O N C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

iv. Add NE A, B, C, and D to the MS group 1 in the MS Group & NE Tree list box, and sort the NEs as A, B, C, and D from top to bottom, as shown in Figure 17.

Page 36: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

20 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 17 MS P R O T E C T I O N C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X (W I T H NE S AD D E D )

v. Click Apply button to confirm the configuration, and a message box will pop up to message the successful MSP configuration.

3. Configure the APS ID

i. Select the MS group 1 in the MS Group List in the MS Protection Config box, and click the Next button to enter the APS ID Config dialog box, as shown in Figure 18.

ii. In this configuration example, use the default values.

F I G U R E 18 APS ID C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

4. Configure the MSP relationship

i. Click Next button in the APS ID Config dialog box shown in Figure 18 to enter the MS Protection dialog box.

Page 37: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 21

ii. Establish the connections between Port 1 of 3# OL64 boards and Port 1 of 3# OL64 boards of NE A, B, C and D.

Note: The meaning of such connection is that for each NE, the last 32 AUG units on the 3# OL64 board protect the first 32 AUG units of the 6# OL64 board; while the last 32 AUG units on the 6# OL64 board protect the first 32 AUG units on the 3# OL64 board.

5. Start the APS

i. Select NEs A, B, C, and D in the client operation window. Then select Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> MS Protection Group APS Operation to enter the APS Operation dialog box, as shown in Figure 19.

F I G U R E 19 APS OP E R AT I O N D I AL O G B O X

ii. Click All Start button in the MS protection group APS operation dialog box to start the APS protocol processor of all the selected NEs.

iii. Click Apply button in Figure 19 to make the ASP operation valid.

[Result]

Take NE A as an example.

After the two-fiber MS ring has been configured, select NE A and the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config in the client operation window to open the Service Config dialog box.

Page 38: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

22 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 20 SE R V I C E C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X O F NE A

The last 32 AUG units on the 3# OL64 board and on the 6# OL64 board of NE A are grayed and cannot be configured.

The “W-1” is displayed in each button of the first 32 AUG units, indicate that they are working paths; while the “P-1” is displayed in each button of the last 32 AUG units, indicating that they are protection paths, as shown in Figure 20.

Configuring Four-fiber 1+1 MSP Link [Purpose]

Configure the four-fiber 1+1 MSP link.

[Steps]

1. Select the NEs to be configured with MSP in the client operation window, and click the menu item Device Config -> Common Management -> MS Protection to pop up the MS Protection Config dialog box, as shown in Figure 14.

2. Configure the MSP group

This step is similar to the configuration of two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. Refer to step 2 in the section of Configuration of Two-fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring. The configuration parameters are listed in Table 14.

T AB L E 14 C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F FO U R -F I B E R 1+1 MSP L I N K

Item Configuration

MS Group ID 2

MS Group Name 2

Page 39: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 23

Item Configuration

MS Group Type SDH Four-Fiber Bi-Dir 1+1 MS link

NEs included in the MS group NE D, E

Protection order No requirement

3. Configure the MSP relationship

Refer to step 4 in the section of Configuration of Two-fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring. The configuration parameters are listed in Table 15.

T AB L E 15 MSP R E L AT I O N S H I P C O N F I G U R AT I O N

NE Name Working Unit Protection Unit

NE D Port 1 of 1# OL16 board Port 1 of 2# OL16 board

NE E Port 1 of 3# OI16 board Port 1 of 12# OI16 board

4. Start the APS

i. Select NE D and NE E in the client operation window.

ii. Select Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> MS Protection Group APS Operation to enter the MS protection group APS operation dialog box, and start the APS protocol processor in it.

[Result]

Take NE E as an example.

After the four-fiber 1+1 MSP link has been configured, select NE E and then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config in the client operation window to open the Service Config dialog box, as shown in Figure 21.

Page 40: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

24 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 21 SE R V I C E C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X O F NE E

All the AUG units on the 12# OL16 board of NE E are grayed and cannot be configured, and the “P-1” is displayed in each AUG button, indicating that they are protection paths.

All the AUG units on the 3# OL16 board of NE E are configurable, and the “W-1” is displayed in each AUG button, indicating that they are working paths, as shown in Figure 21.

Configuring Service [Purpose]

Configure STM-1 optical bidirectional service and 2 M bidirectional service.

The traffic requirements between NEs are listed in Table 16.

T AB L E 16 TR AF F I C R E Q U I R E M E N T S

Service Type Source NE Destination NE Number of Services

NE B 8

NE C 8 Bidirectional STM-1 optical service NE A

NE D 8

Bidirectional 2 M service NE E NE F 20

[Steps]

1. Select all the NEs in the client operation window.

2. Select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to pop up the Service Config dialog box.

Page 41: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 25

3. Configure the timeslots of each NE according to Table 17 to Table 27. All the configurations are bidirectional.

Timeslot configuration of NE A

T AB L E 17 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE A

Optical Interface Board (Tributary) Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)

Board Port→ AUG→ AU4 Board Port AUG→ AU4

OL1[1-1-10] 1 - 8 3# OL64 1 1 - 8

OL1[1-1-11] 1 - 8 6# OL64 1 1 - 8

OL1[1-1-12] 1 - 8 6# OL64 1 9 - 16

Timeslot configuration of NE B.

T AB L E 18 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE B (1 )

Optical Interface Board (Tributary)

Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)

Board Port→ AUG→ AU4 Card Port AUG→

AU4

OL1[1-1-10] 1 - 8 OL64[1-1-3] 1 1 - 8

T AB L E 19 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE B (2 )

Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)

Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)

Board Port AUG→ AU4 Board Port

AUG→ AU4

OL64[1-1-3] 1 9 - 16 OL64[1-1-6] 1 1 - 8

Timeslot configuration of NE C

T AB L E 20 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE C (1 )

Optical Interface Board (Tributary)

Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)

Board Port→ AUG→ AU4 Board Port AUG→

AU4

OL1[1-1-10] 1 - 8 OL64[1-1-3] 1 1 - 8

Page 42: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

26 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 21 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE C (2 )

Optical Interface Board (Tributary)

Board Port→ AUG→ AU4 TUG3 TUG2 TU12

1 1 - 7 1 - 21

2 1 - 7 1 - 21

1 1 - 3

2 1 - 3

OL16[1-1-1] 1

3

3 1 - 2

T AB L E 22 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE C (3 )

Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)

Board Port AU→ AU4 TUG3 TUG2 TU12

1 1 - 7 1 - 21

2 1 - 7 1 - 21

1 1 - 3

2 1 - 3

OL64[1-1-6] 1 1

3

3 1 - 2

Timeslot configuration of NE D

T AB L E 23 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE D (1 )

Optical Interface Board (Tributary) Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)

Board Port→ AUG→ AU4 Board Port AUG→ AU4

OL1[1-1-10] 1 - 8 OL64[1-1-6] 1 1 - 8

T AB L E 24 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE D (2 )

Optical Interface Board (Tributary)

Board Port→ AUG→ AU4 TUG3 TUG2 TU12

1 1 - 7 1 - 21

2 1 - 7 1 - 21

1 1 - 3

2 1 - 3

OL16[1-1-1] 1

3

3 1 - 2

Page 43: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 27

T AB L E 25 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE D (3 )

Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)

Board Port AUG→ AU4 TUG3 TUG2 TU12

1 1 - 7 1 - 21

2 1 - 7 1 - 21

1 1 - 3

2 1 - 3

OL64[1-1-3] 1 1

3

3 1 - 2

Timeslot configuration of NE E

T AB L E 26 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE E

Tributary Board Optical Interface Board

Board 2 M (VC12) Board

Port→ AUG→ AU4

TUG3 TUG2 TU12

1 1 - 7 1 - 21

2 1 - 7 1 - 21

1 1 - 3

2 1 - 3

ET1[1-1-8] 1 - 50 OL16[1-

1-3] 1

3

3 1 - 2

Timeslot configuration of NE F

T AB L E 27 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE F

Tributary Board Optical Interface Board

Board 2 M (VC12) Board

Port→ AUG→ AU4

TUG3 TUG2 TU12

1 1 - 7 1 - 21

2 1 - 7 1 - 21

1 1 - 3

2 1 - 3

EP1A[1-1-13] 1 - 50 OI16[1-1-

5] 1

3

3 1 - 2

[Result]

Select all the NEs in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to pop up the Service Config dialog box.

Page 44: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

28 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Query timeslot connections and check whether they are compliant with the configurations listed in Table 17 to Table 27.

Configuring Clock Source [Purpose]

Configure the networking clock source and the Compatibility.

The clock source configuration includes the configuration of clock source and compatibility.

Configuration Principles:

Clock source configuration

Ensure that the SDH network has only one clock source and the clocks do not become a loop.

Compatibility configuration

The network shown in Figure 1 consists of ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, and ZXMP S360 NEs. Since ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390 belong to the same system type of ZXMP S380/S390, it is only necessary to enable the compatibility of optical interfaces connecting ZXMP S390 and ZXMP S360.

[Steps]

To configure clock source

1. Select all NEs in the client operation window, and select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Clock Source to pop up the Clock Source Config dialog box, as shown in Figure 22.

F I G U R E 22 CL O C K S O U R C E C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

Page 45: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 29

2. Select the NEs one by one, and click the New button to configure the clock source in the Clock Config dialog box for each NE according to Table 28. The Clock Config dialog box is shown in Figure 23.

T AB L E 28 C L O C K S O U R C E C O N F I G U R AT I O N

NE Clock 1 Clock 2 Clock 3 Auto SSM

A External clock, Port 1, Support Frame Internal clock - √

B OL64[1-1-3], Port 1, Extracting Line Clock

OL64[1-1-6], Port 1, Extracting Line Clock

Internal clock √

C OL64[1-1-3], Port 1, Extracting Line Clock

OL64[1-1-6], Port 1, Extracting Line Clock

Internal clock √

D OL64[1-1-6], Port 1, Extracting Line Clock

OL64[1-1-3], Port 1, Extracting Line Clock

Internal clock √

E OL16[1-1-3], Port 1, Extracting Line Clock

OL16[1-1-12], Port 1, Extracting Line Clock

Internal clock √

F OL16[1-1-7], Port 1, Extracting Line Clock Internal clock - √

F I G U R E 23 CL O C K C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

To configure the compatibility

1. In Figure 22, click the Compatible tab to enter the Compatible page.

2. Double-click NE C in the left Resource area, and then click Auto button to set the compatibility, as shown in Figure 24.

Page 46: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

30 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 24 CO M P AT I B L E PAG E O F T H E CL O C K S O U R C E D I AL O G B O X

The setting in Figure 24 indicates that the compatibility of port 1 on 1#OL16 board of NE C is enabled.

[Result]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Clock Source. Make sure that the clock configurations of each NE are compliant with those listed in Table 28

2. Click the Compatible tab. Make sure that the compatibility information is compliant with the above setting.

Configuring the Orderwire [Purpose]

Set orderwire numbers of the network and avoid OW loop.

[Steps]

1. Set the OW number

i. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu item Device Config -> Common Management -> Order Wire to pop up the OW dialog box.

ii. Click AutoSet button to pop up a query dialog box as shown in Figure 25.

Page 47: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 31

F I G U R E 25 OW AU T O -S E T D I AL O G B O X

iii. Click Yes button in Figure 25 to pop up another query dialog box as shown in Figure 26.

F I G U R E 26 AU T O C R E AT E OW N U M B E R D I AL O G B O X

iv. Click Yes button, and then a auto-set OW number will be create.

v. Click Apply button in the OW dialog box to save and forward the configured OW number.

2. To set OW control point

i. In the client operation window, select NE A, click the menu item Device Config-> Common Management-> Order Wire to pop up OW dialog box.

ii. Select the OW Protect radio button in the Control Point area to make the selected NE (NE A) as the control point NE. The default setting of Order in the spin box is “1” which is adopted here.

iii. Click Apply button to confirm the configuration.

3. Set the OW protection bytes

i. Select an NE in the client operation window and then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Select OW Protection Byte to pop up the Select OW Protection Byte dialog box.

ii. In the Select Work Mode area, selct the AutoConfig to activate the AutoCfg(ParaSet) area.

iii. Select R2C9 in the AutoCfg(ParaSet) area to set the same byte in all netting for all NEs, as shown in Figure 27.

Page 48: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

32 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 27 SE L E C T OW P R O T E C T I O N B Y T E D I AL O G B O X

iv. Click the Apply button and the OW protection byte of the whole network is unified to be R2C9.

[Result]

1. The OW number in OW dialog box is same with the setting. Click QueryProtect button, the information displayed in OW Protect information area is according with the setting, as shown in Figure 28.

F I G U R E 28 OW C O N F I G U R AT I O N D I AL O G B O X (QU E R Y R E S U L T )

Page 49: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 33

2. In the Select OW Protection Byte dialog box, each optical interface should have the OW protection byte of R2C9. Select Verifying in Select Work Mode area and click Apply button to verify the OW protection byte in all netting, and then system prompts “OW protection byte of all optical links are configured matchable” , as shown in Figure 29.

F I G U R E 29 SE L E C T OW P R O T E C T I O N B Y T E D I AL O G B O X (V E R I F Y I N G )

Modifying the NE State [Purpose]

Modify the state of NE from offline to online.

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the main view of the client operation window;

2. Select the menu item Device Config -> NE Config -> NE Property to pop up the NE Property dialog box.

3. Change the NE state from offline to online.

Tip: Also, right-click an NE icon in the main view of client operation window and then select Online/Offline item in the shor cut menu.

Note: Before modifying the NE’s state, ensure that IP address of EMS computer and that of the NE are in the same network segment.

Page 50: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

34 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

[Result]

Take NE A as an example. After the NE’s state is modified successfully, the NE A can be pinged successfully in the EMS computer when you execute the command ping 193.55.1.18.

Downloading NE Database [Purpose]

Download all the configuration data to the NCP board of the NE.

[Steps]

1. Select a online NE in the client operation window.

2. Select the menu item System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Download to enter the Download DB dialog box, as shown in Figure 30.

3. Download the configured data to the NCP board.

F I G U R E 30 DO W N L O AD DB D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

After downloading the configuration data successfully, the equipment can operate normally.

Page 51: SDH Configuration

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 35

Select the NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu item Maintenance -> Time Management to enter the Time Management dialog box, which lists the NCP time. If the NCP time is not “0”, which means the EMS communicates with the NE normally and it can supervise the NE as well.

Page 52: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

36 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 53: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 37

C h a p t e r 2

Circuit Service Configuration

This chapter introduces the configuration flow of circuit services in ZXONM E300. In addition, detailed operation steps and methods are described on the basis of the networking example in Chapter 1.

Configuration Flow With the circuit re-discovery function provided by the circuit service management functional module, the timeslots configured manually can be used to create circuits automatically. Users can also create circuits themselves.

According to different creation processes, the circuit creation can be divided into:

Creation of service layer circuits,

Creation of PDH unidirectional/bidirectional circuits,

Creation of broadcast circuits,

Creation of concatenation circuits, and

Creation of data services.

Page 54: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

38 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Service Layer Circuit Definition

Service layer circuits are service-layer connections, which are the basis to achieve PDH circuits and broadcast circuits.

Each service layer circuit can be allocated to multiple circuits.

For the service layer circuit created in AU4 multiplexing mode with the speed E1/E3/DS3/E4, the speed of the circuit is VC4.

For the service layer circuit created in AU3 multiplexing mode with the speed E1/E3/DS3, the speed of the circuit is VC3.

Creating procedure

Figure 31 describes the work flow of creating the service layer circuit.

F I G U R E 31 CR E AT E T H E S E R V I C E L AY E R C I R C U I T

Determine the circuit speed, direction and priority

Determine the information of ends

Set the routing restriction (optional)

Set the protection relation (optional)

Set basic information of the circuit (such as name, user)

Confirm the creation operation

Issue the configuration data

Page 55: SDH Configuration

Chapter 2 - Circuit Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 39

PDH Circuit Definition

PDH circuits refer to the unidirectional and bidirectional circuits with the speed E1/E3/DS3/E4.

The VC4 or VC3 service layer path must be created before creating a PDH circuit.

Creation procedure

Figure 32 describes the work flow of creating PDH circuit.

F I G U R E 32 CR E AT E T H E PDH C I R C U I T

Determine the circuit speed, direction and priority of the PDH circuit

Determine the information of ends

Set the routing restriction (optional)

Set the protection relation (optional)

Set basic information of the circuit (such as name, user)

Confirm the creation operation

Issue the configuration data

Create the service layer circuit

Select the port(optional)

Page 56: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

40 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Broadcast Circuit Definition

Broadcast circuits refer to point-to-multipoint unidirectional circuits with the speed of E1/E3/DS3/E4.

A unidirectional service layer path with the speed of VC4 or VC3 must be created before creating a broadcast circuit.

Creation procedure

1. Create trunk circuit for the broadcast circuit group

F I G U R E 33 C R E AT E TR U N K C I R C U I T

Determine the circuit speed, direction and priority of the broadcast circuit

Determine the information of ends

Set the routing restriction (optional)

Set the protection relation (optional)

Set basic information of the circuit (such as circuit name, user)

Confirm the creation operation

Issue the configuration data

Create the unidirectional service-layer circuit

Select the port(optional)

Determine the property of the broadcast circuit group(create the broadcast group and name it)

Page 57: SDH Configuration

Chapter 2 - Circuit Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 41

2. Add tributaries to the broadcast circuit group

F I G U R E 34 AD D TR I B U T AR I E S

Note: The unidirectional service-layer circuit of the broadcast tributary circuit and the service-layer circuit of the trunk circuit have the same originating ends and different terminating ends. Therefore, you only need to determine the terminating ends of them when determining the ends’ information.

Page 58: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

42 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Concatenation Circuit Definition

ZXONM E300 supports unidirectional circuits and bidirectional concatenation circuits at the rate of VC4-4C, VC4-8C, VC4-16C, VC4-64C, and VC4-nC (2 ≤ n ≤ 64).

Creation procedure

Figure 35 described the work flow of creating the concatenation circuit.

F I G U R E 35 CR E AT E C O N C A T E N AT I O N C I R C U I T

Determine the circuit speed, direction and priority of the concatenation circuit

Determine the information of ends

Set the routing restriction (optional)

Set the protection relation (optional)

Set basic information of the circuit (such as name, user)

Confirm the creation operation

Issue the configuration data

Select the path

Page 59: SDH Configuration

Chapter 2 - Circuit Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 43

Data Service Circuit Definition

Data service circuits refer to Ethernet service circuits. You may implement service configuration at the system side by creating Ethernet service circuits when ZXMP S320, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S360, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390 need to transmit Ethernet services.

Creation procedure

Figure 36 described the work flow of creating the data service circuit.

F I G U R E 36 CR E AT E D AT A S E R V I C E C I R C U I T

Page 60: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

44 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Configuring PDH Circuit [Purpose]

Add 2 M circuit service from NE E to NE B in the networking example of Chapter 1.

[Steps]

1. Configure the board

Add an ET1 board to the slot 2 for NE E and NE B respectively.

2. Start the circuit service management module

i. Select NE E and NE B in the client operation window.

ii. Select the menu item SNMS -> Circuit Service Management to pop up the Circuit Service Management dialog box.

iii. Select the menu item Circuit Management -> Create to enter Create Circuit-Speed, Direction, Priority dialog box, as shown in Figure 37.

F I G U R E 37 CR E AT E C I R C U I T -S P E E D , D I R E C T I O N , P R I O R I T Y D I AL O G B O X

3. Create the service layer circuit where the PDH circuit is located

i. Select SDH E2E for the E2E type, and VC4 Server for the speed, the Bi-Dir as the direction, as shown in Figure 37.

ii. Click Next button to enter the Create Circuit-Node Information dialog box.

iii. Select E in the NE A drop-down list box, and B in the NE Z drop-down list box.

iv. Set the Circuit Num as 1, as shown in Figure 38.

Page 61: SDH Configuration

Chapter 2 - Circuit Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 45

F I G U R E 38 CR E AT E C I R C U I T -N O D E I N F O R M AT I O N D I AL O G B O X

Note: In this example, it is unnecessary to set the route restriction, protection relation and basic information. Just use their default values.

v. Click Complete button to enter the Create Circuit-Affirm dialog box, as shown in Figure 39.

F I G U R E 39 CR E AT E C I R C U I T - AF F I R M D I AL O G B O X

vi. Click OK button to save the settings and return to the Circuit Service Management dialog box.

4. Create the PDH-layer circuit

i. In the Circuit Service Management dialog box, select Circuit Management -> Create to enter the Create Circuit-Speed, Direction, Priority dialog box in Figure 37.

ii. Select SDH E2E as the E2E type, and E1 as the speed, the Bi-Dir as the direction.

iii. Click Next to enter the Create Circuit-Node information dialog box.

Page 62: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

46 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

iv. Select E in the NE A drop-down list box, and B in the NE Z drop-down list box. And unselect the Auto select port check box, as shown in Figure 40.

F I G U R E 40 CR E AT E C I R C U I T -N O D E I N F O R M AT I O N D I AL O G B O X

v. Click the Select End button to enter the Select AZ End Termination dialog box. Select the board ET1[1-1-2] and port 1 for NE E and B respectively, and then click Add, as shown in Figure 41.

F I G U R E 41 SE L E C T AZ E N D TE R M I N AT I O N D I AL O G B O X

vi. Click OK to return to the Create Circuit-Node Information dialog box.

Page 63: SDH Configuration

Chapter 2 - Circuit Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 47

Note: In this example, it is unnecessary to set the route restriction, protection relation and basic information. Just use their default values.

vii. Click the Complete button to confirm the configuration.

5. Send configuration data

i. In the Circuit Service Management dialog box, select the menu item Circuit Management -> Send Circuits Config to enter the Send Circuits Config dialog box.

ii. Select SendPart in the Send Way drop-down list box of NE E and B respectively.

iii. Click the Send button to send the configuration.

[Result]

Select the NE E in the client operation window, and select Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Insert Alarm to enter the Insert Alarm dialog box.

Insert an AIS alarm in Port 1 on the ET1[1-1-2] board of NE E.

After sending the command, query the current alarm of the NE B. If Port 1 on the ET1[1-1-2] board reports the AIS alarm, then the service configuration between NE E and NE B is correct.

Page 64: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

48 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 65: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 49

C h a p t e r 3

Ethernet Service Configuration

This chapter introduces the configuration flow of ZXONM E300 for the transmission of Ethernet services through SDH equipment. In addition, the detailed configuration procedures of VLAN services are described based on a network example composed of ZXMP S320 equipment with SFE4 boards.

Configuration of Ethernet Service Transparent Transmission The transparent transmission of Ethernet service is performed by the transparent transmission Ethernet boards. These boards provide paths for point-to-point transparent transmission, and bind user ports with VCG (EOS) ports (i.e. system ports) in a one-to-one way. Data frames are only forwarded between the user port and the VCG port bound together.

The equipment and boards that support transparent transmission of Ethernet service are described in Table 29.

Page 66: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

50 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 29 TR AN S P AR E N T T R AN S M I S S I O N E T H E R N E T BO AR D S

Board Description

Board ID in EMS

Board ID in equipment/composing

Description of User Ports

Number of User Ports

Number of VCG (EOS) Ports

Software/Hardware Version

Applicable Equipment

Gigabit transparent transmission Ethernet optical board

TGEB

TGE2B-E 1000 M Ethernet Optical Port

2 2 0320

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

Gigabit transparent transmission Ethernet optical board

TGEB

TGE2B 1000 M Ethernet Optical Port

2 2 0320 ZXMP S385

SMB 10/100 M Ethernet Electrical Port

4 4 0310

SMB+TFEx4 10/100 M

Ethernet Electrical Port

4(Electrical port)+4(Electrical port)

8 0320

Transparent Fast Ethernet Interface board

TFE

SMB+TFEx4B

10/100 M Ethernet Electrical Port+100 M Ethernet Optical Port

4(Electrical port)+4(Optical port)

8 2320

ZXMP S200

TFE board of ZXMP S200 is responsible for managing the Ethernet function of physical board SMB and the Ethernet plug-in boards. The physical board SMB can process 8 Ethernet services which can be performed by 4x10/100 M transparent transmission Ethernet electrical ports on the SMB board and another 4 Ethernet ports on SEC board, TFEX4 board or TFEX4B board. Among these boards,

SEC provides 4x10/100 M Ethernet electrical ports (layer 2 switching supported). TFEx4 provides 4 10/100 M transparent transmission Ethernet electrical ports. TFEx4B provides 4 100 M transparent transmission Ethernet optical ports.

TFEx4 and TFEx4B are set in the slot of subrack (slot No. is 11 on EMS). However, it is no necessary to configure the board on the EMS manually because the EMS can set the “TFE INTERFACE” board in slot 11 automatically based on the version of software and hardware of TFE.

Page 67: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 51

If ZXMP S200 is equipped with SEC, the version of software and hardware of ZXMP S200 is set as 0330. Moreover, SEC board needs to be added on the EMS. Detailed configuration information refers to SE Boards in Chapter 3.

Configuring TGEB Board 1. Install boards other than TGEB for the NE

In the client operation window, double-click the NE icon to open the Card Management dialog box. Install all the functional boards, as well as optical line board for adding/dropping Ethernet service.

2. Install the TGEB board

i. In the Card Management dialog box, select Presetting check box.

ii. Click TGEB button, the slots area of TGEB board in the simulative subrack turns into yellow.

iii. Click the slot in yellow, which means add the TGEB board into the simulative subrack, then Card Property dialog box pops up.

iv. Select the software/hardware version of 0320 in the pop-up Card Property dialog box. Take ZXMP S380 as example in Figure 42.

Page 68: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

52 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 42 TGEB I N S T AL L AT I O N I N T E R F AC E

Caution: The software/hardware version cannot be modified in the Card property dialog box unless the Presetting has been selected. Therefore, make sure to select the Presetting check box.

3. Configure the advanced property

Click Advanced... button in Card Property dialog box of TGEB board to go to Advanced... dialog box.

i. Configure the path group

Select Path Group Config page, add AU4 virtual concatenation according to the Ethernet service capability.

ii. Configure the system port capability

Select Port Capability Config page, assign the path group for system port.

Page 69: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 53

iii. Configure LCAS

Select LCAS Config page, set if to enable the LCAS function and configure the timeslot for LCAS function.

iv. Configure the user ports

Select Data Port Attribute page, click or unclick Flow Control check box according to the requirements of Ethernet service.

4. Configure the service

i. Select the NE that adds/drops Ethernet traffic in client operation window.

ii. Click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to enter Service Config dialog box.

ii. Establish the connection between the system ports of TGEB board and the ports of optical line board. When the type of timeslot for path group is VC4, the unit is 140 M tributary for AU4 virtual concatenation.

5. Configure the optical line boards of the passed-by site

i. Click a passed-by site in the client operation window

ii. Select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config.

iii. Establish the pass-through connection for the passed-by optical line board.

Configuring TFE Board 1. Install boards other than TFE for the NE

In the client operation window, double-click the NE icon to open the Card Management dialog box. Install all the functional boards, as well as optical line board for adding/dropping Ethernet traffic.

2. Install the TFE board

i. In the Card Management dialog box, select the Presetting check box.

ii. Click TFE button, the slot 7 area in the simulative subrack turns into yellow.

iii. Click the slot in yellow, which means add the board at this slot. Then, Card Property dialog box pops up.

iv. Select software/hardware version based on the physical board on the real subrack. The selection principles are listed in Table 30.

T AB L E 30 S E L E C T I O N P R I N C I P L E S O F TFE B O AR D

Physical Board Software/Hardware Version

Subrack without Ethernet Interface Board

0310

TFEx4 0320

Page 70: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

54 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Physical Board Software/Hardware Version

TFEx4B 2320

SEC 0330

Normally, if the hardware version is 0320 or 2320, EMS can automatically add “TFE INTERFACE” board into the slot 11.

3. Configure the advanced property

Click Advanced... button in Card Property dialog box of TFE board to go to the Advanced... dialog box.

i. Configure the working mode

Keep the default setting in the Working Mode page.

ii. Configure data board property

Set IP Address, TPID, JUMBO Configuration and Ping Enable in the Data Card Property page according to the descriptions in Table 31.

T AB L E 31 D AT A P R O P E R T Y O F TFE B O AR D

Items Descriptions Remarks

IP address IP address of the board

By remote ping function of the data board, the IP address is just used to judge whether the equipment and the board are normally connected.

TPID Port VLAN ID of the board, it is generally 0x8100

When the VLAN processing mode is TLS access mode at the port of TFE board, the received frame are added with VLAN tag including TPID information.

JUMBO Configuration

Support or not support 1518 byte JUMBO frame at the port.

-

Ping Enable Disable or enable remote Ping function, “disable” by default.

When the ping function is enabled, ping operation can be executed between PC computer and board, also between the boards. If PC computer pings the board, IP addresses of the computer and the board should be in the same network segment, however, ping operation between the boards has no this limitation.

4. Configure VCG (EOS) port capability

Select an NE (e.g. ZXMP S200 equipped with TFE board) in the client operation window, and then click menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> VCG TS Port Config to configure the capability of Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG).

Page 71: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 55

Note:

If the software/hardware version of TFE is 0310, TFE board provides 4 VCG (EOS) ports which are corresponding to the 4 user ports of SMB board.

If the software/hardware version is the other, TFE board provides 8 VCG (EOS) ports, among which, the first 4 VCG (EOS) ports are corresponding to the 4 user ports of SMB board. The last 4 VCG (EOS) ports are corrspongding to the 4 user ports of TFEx4 board or TFEX4B board.

Configuration principles are as following.

The maximum bandwidth of VCG (EOS) ports is 10×STS-1 (518.4 Mbit/s) in total.

VCG (EOS) port supports virtual concatenation and mapping at VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 level. Different VCG (EOS) ports can be configured with different VC containers, but one VCG (EOS) port can only be configured with the containers in the same level. The regulations are listed in Table 32.

T AB L E 32 M AP P I N G R E G U L AT I O N S O F S Y S T E M P O R T S I N TFE B O AR D

Mapping Method

Number of Virtual Concatenation Group Number of Members

VC-4 1 Supports two VC-4s at most.

VC-3 1-3 Supports ten VC-3s at most.

VC-12 1-63 Supports 210 VC-12s at most.

Generally, LACS, package type, delay time and if to activate the VCG port adopt the default settings which are bidirectional LACS, GFP, 0 ms and activate respectively. Currently, TFE does not support the configurations of delay time and if to activate the VCG port.

5. Configure the user ports

In the client operation window, select an NE, and then click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> Ethernet adapter manager. Enable the user ports, and configure the property of user ports according to the following instructions.

Note: In Ethernet Adapter Manager dialog box, after configurations in each page are completed, click Apply button to make the changes valid. Otherwise, the configurations in the before page will not be saved when the page is shifted to the other.

i. Configure port property

In the PortProperty page of the Ethernet adapter manager dialog box, set the speed, duplex mode, flow control method, cross

Page 72: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

56 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

connect type and if to use the user port. The setting principles are listed in Table 33. Click Apply button to make the settings valid.

T AB L E 33 P O R T P R O P E R T I E S O F E T H E R N E T AD AP T E R M AN AG E R D I AL O G B O X

Items Descriptions Remark

If use

If to start the user port. It is a mandatory item. The non-used user ports should not be started.

User ports 1-4 are corresponding to 1-4 Ethernet interfaces of physical board SMB.

User ports 5-8 are corresponding to 1-4 Ethernet interfaces of TFEx4 board or TFEx4B board.

Choose the speed

Choose the speed at user port. It is a mandatory item. Ethernet electrical interface

supports AUTO (auto-negotiation), 10 M and 100 M.

Ethernet optical interface supports AUTO (auto-negotiation) and 100 M.

Choose the duplex mode

Choose the duplex mode at user port. It is a mandatory item. Ethernet electrical interface and optical interface both support AUTO (auto-negotiation) and FULL (full-duplex), besides, Ethernet electrical port supports HALF (half-duplex).

Speed and duplex mode of the docking device and local device should be consistent with each other. For example, the port of the remote device is set as AUTO, then that of the local device should be set as AUTO as well.

Flow Control

Select the flow control function. Usually, flow control is used if the bandwidth at the system side is lack.

If the bandwidth at the system side is lack, meanwhile the docking device and local device both support and use the flow control function, the transmission flow will be reduced to avoid packet loss.

Cross connect type

Select the type of cable for FE electrical interface; the type includes MDIX Auto, MDIX Constraint and MDI Constraint. For ZXMP S200 V1.00, the type of cable is MDIX Auto by default.

Two ports are connected with cable, then, If configured as MDIX Auto,

the ports can self-negotiate with both crossover cable and straight through cable; if configured as MDIX Constraint or MDI Constraint, the ports must be connected with crossover cable; if configured as MDIX and MDI respectively, the two ports must be connected with straight through cable.

If the type of cross connect and the type of cable are mismatched, the port will

Page 73: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 57

Items Descriptions Remark

be in linkdown state. If the speed and the

working duplex mode are selected as one of the constraint modes, the type of cross connect should be configured as MDIX Constraint or MDI Constraint; if the speed and the working duplex mode are selected as auto mode, the type of cross connect should be configured as MDIX Auto. Otherwise, the service would be influenced.

ii. Set VLAN mark

In the VLAN Mark page of the Ethernet adapter manager dialog box, set the parameters of VLAN process mode, PVID, Qos PRI, transparent port and the port for link transparent according to the principles listed in Table 34. Click Apply button after configurations to make them valid.

T AB L E 34 S E T T I N G S O F VLAN M AR K P A G E O F TFE BO AR D

Items Descriptions Remark

VLAN process mode

Select the VLAN process mode at user port. For ZXMP S200 V1.00, the user port only supports transparent transmission mode, for ZXMP S200 V2.00 or above version, the user port supports transparent transmission mode and TLS access mode.

Under the transparent transmission mode, the user port and VCG (EOS) should be corresponding one-to-one, so the service can be transmitted transparently between the two ports.

Under the TLS access mode, no matter whether the packet received takes the VLAN label or not, it will be exchanged after added VLAN tag according to the priorities of TPID, PVID and Qos.

If TPID in the VALN label of the packet is matched with TPID of the board, the packet will be transferred after the outmost tag is stripped; if the TPID in the VALN tag is not matched with TPID of the board, the packet will be transferred directly.

PVID Set VLAN ID from 1 to 4095

This item is valid only if the user port is under the TLS access mode.

Qos priority Set the priorities of Qos service from 1 to 8. The bigger the value is; the

This item is valid only if the user port is under the TLS access mode.

Page 74: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

58 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Items Descriptions Remark

higher the service priority is.

Link transport state

Set if the user port support link transport state.

This item is valid only if the user port is under transparent transmission mode and the GFP encapsulation mode is adopted.

For ZXMP S200 V1.00, TFE board only supports transparent transmission mode.

6. Configure service

i. In the client operation window, select the NE to be configured.

ii. Click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.

iii. Establish the connections between the VCG (EOS) port of TFE board and the ports of optical line board according to the configuration method of timeslot cross-connect.

Tip: Another way to entern the Ethernet adapter manager dialog box and the VCG Port Capacity Config dialog box:

In the Card Management dialog box of ZXMP S200, right-click the TFE board and its shortcut menu will pop up. Click the corresponding menu items in the shortcut menu of TFE board.

7. Configure the optical line boards of passed-by sites

i. In the client operation window, select the passed-by NEs one by one.

ii. Click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box. Then establish the pass-through connection between the passed-by optical line boards.

Configuration of Smart Ethernet Board ZTE provides the following types of smart Ethernet boards: SFE/SGE series board, and SE board, which are configured in different ways.

Configuring SFE/SGE Series Boards [Introduction]

The SFE/SGE series boards are listed in Table 35.

Page 75: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 59

T AB L E 35 SFE/SGE S E R I E S B O AR D S

Board Name Board ID

User Port Quantity

System Port Quantity

Applicable Equipment

Smart Gigabit Ethernet optical board SGEB 2 16

Smart Fast Ethernet electrical interface board SFE 8 8

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

8-port Smart Fast Ethernet board SFE8 8 8

4-port Smart Fast Ethernet board (optical interface) SFE4B 4 8

ZXMP S360

Smart Fast Ethernet electrical interface board SFE 4 6 ZXMP S330

ZXMP S325

4-port Smart Fast Ethernet board SFE4 4 8

4-port Smart Fast Ethernet board (optical interface) SFE4B 4 4

ZXMP S320

The user ports of SFE series boards are 10/100 M Ethernet interfaces, and those of SGE series boards are 1000 M Ethernet optical interfaces. Except the SFE board of ZXMP S330, “B” in the board ID indicates that the user ports are optical; otherwise, the user ports are electrical.

The user ports of SFE board in ZXMP S330 and ZXMP S325 support both 10/100 M Ethernet optical interfaces and 10/100 M Ethernet electrical interfaces. In EMS, these two kinds of Ethernet interfaces are identified by the software and hardware version, where “0310” represents for SFE electrical interface board, and “1310” represents for SFE optical interface board.

The system ports of SFE/SGE series boards adopt the TU12 virtual concatenation. Each system port has the minimum granularity of 2 M and the maximum granularity of 100 M.

Currently, SFE/SGE series boards go out of production

[Steps]

1. Install boards other than SFE/SGE for the NE

In the client operation window, double-click the NE icon to open the Card Management dialog box. Install all the functional boards, as well as optical line board for adding/dropping Ethernet service.

2. Install SFE/SGE boards for the NE

i. In the Card Management dialog box. Click the button representing for SFE/SGE series boards, the corresponding slot in the simulative subrack turns into yellow.

ii. Click the slot in yellow, which means add the board at this slot.

Page 76: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

60 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Caution: When installing SFE board for ZXMP S330/ZXMP S325, the software/hardware version cannot be modified in the Card property dialog box unless the Presetting has been selected. Therefore, make sure to check the Presetting check box. The SFE electrical interface board with version 0310 is installed by default.

3. Configure the SFE/SGE series board

Right-click the SFE/SGE series board in the Card Management dialog box, and select Property in the shortcut menu to enter the Card Property dialog box.

Then click Advanced button to enter the Advanced dialog box.

i. Configure the user ports

Select Data Port Attribute page, set the property of the user ports according to the flowchart shown in Figure 43. The parameters are listed in Table 36.

Page 77: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 61

F I G U R E 43 US E R P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F SFE/SGE BO AR D

Enable the user port

Select the DuplexMode and Speed

Input the Pvid

Enable the flowcontrol function

Select the QoSPriority

Access Mode Trunk Mode

Flow Control

QoS

Set the Self Study MAC,OutRateLimit, and Trunking

Group

None

Delay Mode

WFQ Mode

The Data PortAttribute page

Configure another user port?

End

Begin

Yes

No

Select the VLANMode

Determine if to use flow controlor Qos

Select the QoSConfig mode

T AB L E 36 U S E R P O R T CO N F I G U R AT I O N P AR AM E T E R S O F SFE/SGE BO AR D

Parameter Description Remarks

Port Use State

The type and quantity of user port is determined by the board type

The port configuration will not take effect until the port is enabled.

VLAN Mode

Includes the access mode and the trunk mode: Access Mode: The received data frames carry no VLAN ID. They are added with a VLAN layer according to the PVID of this port, and then are exchanged. Trunk Mode: The received data frames must have VLAN mark, and

If the port adopts the access mode, it is necessary to set the port speed, duplex mode, and PVID.

Page 78: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

62 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Parameter Description Remarks

those with no VLAN ID will be filtered out. The transmit side does not strip VLAN.

Speed Select work speed for the port.

Duplex Mode Select work mode for the port.

The speed of the abutting equipment should comply with the duplex mode.

PVID In access mode, the port will add VLAN ID to the received data frame.

Value range from 1 to 4095

Flow Control

Once the flow control of a user port is enabled: The flow control should also

be enabled for the port of user equipment which connects to this user port.

The flow control should be enabled for the corresponding system port simultaneously.

QoS Priority

Flow control and QoS are two methods to handle network congestion. They have opposite principles and cannot be used at the same time.

If the system port bandwidth is less than the corresponding user port traffic, flow control is recommended for user port and system port.

If multiple user ports share one system port, QoS should be enabled.

If a user port employs the WFQ mode of QoS, QoS priority should be selected. Each QoS priority corresponds to a bandwidth ratio, and the bandwidth is configured in the system port configuration.

Self Study MAC

Set if the user port supports self-study of MAC address. If this function is disabled, the port has to obtain the destination address via the static MAC address configuration.

It is recommended to enable this function.

OutRateLimit Limit the rate of data frames sent by the user port. There is no limit by default.

Trunking Group

Bind all the ports with the same physical type to one logical port so as to increase bandwidth capacity of link, evenly distribute data into multiple physical links, and protect links using redundant routes.

It is optional and can be configured according to service requirement.

ii. Configure the system ports

Configure the system ports in the Data Port Attribute page, Path Group Config page, Set Port Capacity page, and LCAS page. The configuration flowchart is shown in Figure 44, and the parameters are listed in Table 37.

Page 79: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 63

F I G U R E 44 SY S T E M P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F SFE/SGE B O AR D

Enable the systemport

Input the Pvid

Enable the flowcontrol function

Determine the relationshipbetween the QoS Priority andthe WFQ bandwidth allocation

mode

Access Mode(seldom used) Trunk Mode

Flow Control

QoS

Set the Self Study MAC andTrunking Group

None

DelayMode

WFQ Mode

Data Port Attributepage

Configure another systemport?

Begin

Yes

No

Select theEncapsulation Type

End

Bind TU12 unit as per theEthernet traffic capacity

Create a new pathgroup

Path Group Configpage

Assign path group to theenabled system portSet Port Capacity

page

LCAS Config page

Select the enabled systemport

Enable the LCAS function?

Select the TU12 unit to beenabled with the LCAS function

Configure another systemport?

No

Yes

Yes

No

Select the VLANMode

Determine if to use flow controlor QoS

Select the QoSConfig mode

Page 80: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

64 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 37 S Y S T E M P O R T CO N F I G U R AT I O N P AR AM E T E R S O F SFE/SGE B O AR D

Parameter Description Remarks

Port Use State

The type and quantity of system port is determined by the board type

The port configuration will not take effect until the port is enabled.

VLAN Mode Includes the access mode and the trunk mode: Refer to Table 36.

The trunk mode is recommended for system port.

Pvid In access mode, the port will add VLAN ID to the received data frame. Value range: 1 to 4095

Flow Control

Once the flow control of a system port is enabled, the flow control should be enabled for the corresponding user port simultaneously.

QoS Priority

Flow control and QoS are two methods to handle network congestion. They have opposite principles and cannot be used at the same time.

If the system port bandwidth is less than the corresponding user port traffic, flow control is recommended for user port and system port.

If multiple user ports share one system port, QoS should be enabled.

If a system port employs the WFQ mode of QoS, the relationship between the QoS priority and the bandwidth must be configured.

Path Group Config

Configure VC12 virtual concatenation group.

Set Port Capacity Assign path groups to system ports.

The system ports at both ends of Ethernet traffic must have the same transmission capacity. Otherwise, the traffic is blocked.

LCAS Config

LCAS refers to the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. When the user bandwidth changes, LCAS can adjust the number of VC paths in a virtual concatenation group to prevent traffic interruption or only cause transient interruption.

When the LCAS is enabled, if a VC in a path group fails, the system will automatically delete the invalid VC, and the remaining normal VCs can keep transmitting traffic. When the invalid VC recovers, the system will add the VC into the virtual concatenation group.

The LCAS function is recommended for system ports.

iii. Configure the board property

In the Data Card Property page, set the running mode and MAC address of the board. Parameter and configuration principles are listed in Table 38.

Page 81: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 65

T AB L E 38 P AR AM E T E R S O F SFE/SGE B O AR D P R O P E R T Y

Running Mode

Items Descriptions Remarks

Default Mode

The port forwards data packets by searching the MAC address table, thus implements the arbitrary switching between user ports and system ports.

Enabling two or more ports in this mode on a board may result in broadcast storm, and finally result in traffic failure

Transparent Mode

The MAC address and VLAN are shielded. The point-to-point transparent transmission path is provided. Data frames can be forwarded only between the user port and the system port that are bound to each other.

It is similar to the transparent transmission by physical channel, and can transparently transmit various protocol frames including 802.1x frames.

If a board employs the transparent mode, the VLAN mode configuration of the user port becomes invalid.

VLAN Mode

Data frames are forwarded by the assigned VLAN and by searching the MAC address table. Traffic between different VLANs is blocked for the sake of isolation and security.

It can ensure the traffic security. However, when the traffic contains a large number of VLANs, each VLAN needs to be configured independently, which requires a lot of work.

Virtual Channel Mode

Functions which are similar with those of VLAN mode: The frame is transferred by identifying VLAN and MAC address. The services among different VLANs can not inter-communicate, which guarantee the security and insulation of the service.

Functions which are not similar with those of VLAN mode: Virtual channel mode provides a different way to process the frame. Under the virtual channel mode, no matter whether the frame received at the port carry or not carry VLAN ID, the board will add a layer of VLAN (that is QinQ) to the frame; Under the trunk mode, the frame received at the port should carry VLAN ID, moreover, the VLAN ID must be consistent with the VLAN ID of the port, otherwise, the frame will be filtrated.

TPID under the virtual channel mode is 0x88A which does not support RSTP.

Page 82: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

66 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Running Mode

Items Descriptions Remarks

MAC Address

Description Remarks

Input the MAC address of the board in HEX format.

The MAC addresses should be unique to avoid broadcast storm.

4. Configure VLAN and STP

If the running mode of the Ethernet board is Default Mode or Transparent Mode, go to step 5 directly. Otherwise, follow the flowchart shown in Figure 45 to configure VLAN and STP. The parameters are listed in Table 39.

Page 83: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 67

F I G U R E 45 VL AN/STP C O N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F SFE/SGE BO AR D

Begin

Create a customer

End

Is there any customer?Yes

No

Select the NE, click the menu item SNMS ->Customer Management

CustomerManagement dialog box

Select the NE to be configured with VLAN, select the menu itemDevice Config -> Ethernet Management -> Configure

Virtual LAN with The Data Card

Click the customer

Click the Add VLAN button

Set the VLAN Name andVLAN IDs for the VLAN

added

Click the VLAN added

Add user ports and systemports to the VLAN

Issue and apply thesettings

Enable the STP protocol?

Click the VLAN

Click the BridgeSetbutton

Select the card andenable the STP

No

Yes

Configure Virtual LANwith The Data Card

diaglog box

BridgeSet dialog box

Page 84: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

68 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 39 VLAN/STP C O N F I G U R AT I O N D E S C R I P T I O N O F SFE/SGE BO AR D

Operation Description Configuration Principles

VLAN configuration

Create a VLAN and add user ports and system port to it. This operation is mandatory.

The SFE/SGE board can only create VLAN with sequential IDs in batch.

The VLAN ID of a port must be identical with the Pvid configured for the port in the Data Port Attribute page.

Value range of VLAN ID: 1 to 4095. However, VLAN IDs from 4078 to 4095 are reserved; do not try to use them.

STP configuration

When the Ethernet traffic becomes a ring or mesh network, it is recommended to configure the STP to avoid traffic loop.

(Number of VLANs with STP enabled) ≤ 30

(Number of VLANs with STP enabled) × (Number of ports) ≤ 120

5. Configure the services

i. In the client operation window, select the NE responsible for adding/dropping Ethernet traffic.

ii. Select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.

iii. Establish connection between VC12 path of the Ethernet board and the TU12 of optical line board using the timeslot cross-connect configuration method.

6. Configure the optical line board of the passed-by site

i. Select the passed-by site icon in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.

ii. Establish pass-through connection with the passed-by optical line board.

Configuring SE Boards [Introduction]

The SE boards are listed in Table 40.

Page 85: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 69

T AB L E 40 SE B O AR D S

Board Name and Combination

Board Name and Version in EMS

User Port Quantity

VCG (EOS) Port Quantity

Bandwidth

Applicable Equipment

SECx48A SE (0320) 8 FE (electrical) 1 GbE (optical)

SECx48B SE (1320) 8 FE (optical) 1 GbE (optical)

48 1.25 Gbit/s

SECx24A SE (0310) 8 FE (electrical) 1 GbE (optical)

SECx24B SE (1310) 8 FE (optical) 1 GbE (optical)

24 622 Mbit/s

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

SECx48 + ESFEx8 SE (0320)

8 FE (electrical) 1 GbE (optical)

SECx48 + OIS1x8 SE (1320)

8 FE (optical) 1 GbE (optical)

48 1.25 Gbit/s

SECx24 + ESFEx8 SE (0310)

8 FE (electrical) 1 GbE (optical)

SECx24 + OIS1x8 SE (1310)

8 FE (optical) 1 GbE (optical)

24 622 Mbit/s

ZXMP S385

SEC SE (0310) 4 FE (electrical) None 518.4

Mbit/s ZXMP S200

Note:

The processing board of SECx48/SECx24 and the interface board of ESFEx8/OIS1x8 work together to implement the SEC board of ZXMP S385. The processing board in inserted in the service functional board area of subrack, while the interface board is inserted in the service functional interface board area of subrack.

The board name in EMS refers to the board button name of SEC board in the Card Management dialog box. The version refers to the software/hardware version selected in the Card Property dialog box when adding the SEC board.

For ZXMP S200, SEC board transparently transmits/receives the services to/from the 5-8 VCG (EOS) ports of TFE board via the internal Ethernet ports of SEC board to achieve layer 2 switch.

[Steps]

1. Install boards other than SE board for the NE

In the client operation window, double-click the NE icon to open the Card Management dialog box. Install all the functional boards, as well as optical line board for adding/dropping Ethernet service.

Page 86: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

70 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

2. Install SE boards for the NE

i. In the Card Management dialog box. Click the button representing for SE board, the corresponding slot in the simulative subrack turns into yellow.

ii. Click the slot in yellow, which means add the board at this slot.

Caution:

For ZXMP S200, it is necessary to install TFE board with software/hardware version of 0330 before installing SE board.

The software/hardware version cannot be modified in the Card property dialog box unless the Presetting has been selected. Therefore, make sure to check the Presetting check box.

The software version and hardware version must be consistent. Refer to Table 40.

3. Configure the property of SE board

i. Right-click the SE board in the Card Management dialog box, and select the menu item Property in the shortcut menu to enter the Card Property dialog box.

ii. Click the Advanced button to enter the Advanced dialog box.

iii. Select Working Mode page and keep default settings.

Caution: Do not modify the settings in the Working Mode page randomly.

iv. Select Data Card Property page to set the properties of the data board. Parameters are listed in Table 41.

T AB L E 41 P AR AM E T E R S O F SE B O AR D P R O P E R T Y

Mac Addr Table Learning

Options Descriptions Remarks

Independent VLAN Learning

It is abbreviated as IVL, which means the MAC address table contains both VLAN ID and MAC address

Default option.

Shared VLAN Learning

It is abbreviated as SVL, which means the MAC address table only contains MAC address.

Only used for special requirement.

TPID

Options Descriptions Remarks

Page 87: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 71

0x8810

It is the standard byte specified by 802.1Q, and usually is used for interworking with equipment from other manufacturer.

0x88A8

TPID is the ID which identifies the outmost VLAN layer. It has two options: 0x8100 and 0x88A8. TPID of the local device should be consistent with the TPID of the docking device.

TPID + VLAN ID can implement the VLAN extended function, where the TPID and VLAN ID must be the same as those of the docking port.

It is used for interworking with the SFE/SGE series board which is set to the Virtual Channel Mode.

Other Parameters

Items Description

IP Address

Set the IP address of the board, which can be configured according to requirement. By remote ping function of the data board, the IP address is just used to judge whether the equipment and the board are normally connected. Hence, IP address has no influence on the service.

Set MAC Aging

Set the aging time for MAC address. The default value is 300 seconds. The value can range from 1 second to 30000 seconds. Generally, keep the default setting.

JUMBO Configuration

Select if all the ports of board support ultra-long frame longer than 1518 bytes. “Support” by default.

Broadcast Limit Configuration

Set whether the board has broadcast limitation or not, the default setting is “Not Limit”. Currently, SE board of ZXMP S200 does not support this function.

Ping Enable

Set whether the board supports Ping function or not, the default setting is disabled. When the ping function is enabled, ping operation can be executed between PC computer and board, also between the boards. If PC computer pings the board, IP addresses of the computer and the board should be in the same network segment, however, ping operation between the boards has no this limitation.

LACP Priority

Set LACP priorities of the board. Now, this function is invalid for SE board. The LACP protocol will be rejoined if the setting is modified, which maybe influence the services, hence, the default setting is recommended.

Spanning Tree Protocol

Select spanning tree protocol for the board, only Multi Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is supported by now.

MSTP Protocol

Select the configuration state of MSTP, including disable, enable and relay. The default setting is recommended.

If configured as “Enable”, MSTP protocol is used normally, and the board will process the received message with MSTP protocol;

If configured as “Disable”, The board will throw away the received message with MSTP protocol;

If configured as “Relay”, the board will directly transfer the received message with MSTP protocol to all of the port, which indicates that the MSTP message will not be restrained by VLAN, so pay more attentions to the “Relay” mode in the engineering.

Page 88: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

72 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Use the default value for parameters not described in this table.

4. Configure user ports and VCG (EOS) ports

In the client operation window, select an NE equipped with the SE board. Click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> Ethernet adapter manager. Enable the user ports and VCG (EOS) ports, and configure their properties. The configuration includes the following steps.

i. Configure port properties

Enable and configure user ports and VCG (EOS) ports on the PortProperty page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog box. The configuration flowchart of user ports is shown in Figure 46, and that of system ports is shown in Figure 47. The parameters and configuration principles are listed in Table 42. For ZXMP S200, it is necessary to enable and configure user ports and internal Ethernet ports.

Note: 1-4 internal Ethernet ports of SE board are corresponding to 5-8 VCG (EOS) ports of TFE board, therefore, the 1-4 internal Ethernet ports and 5-8 VCG (EOS) ports should be configured. The configurations of VCG (EOS) ports refer to Configuring TFE Board. The configurations of 1-4 internal Ethernet ports of SE board are consistent with those of TFE board. The operations of internal Ethernet ports are similar with those of VCG (EOS) ports.

For ZXMP S200, SE board does not provide VCG (EOS) configuration.

F I G U R E 46 CO N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F SE B O AR D U S E R P O R T S

Page 89: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 73

F I G U R E 47 CO N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F SE B O AR D VCG (EOS) P O R T S

Enable the VCG (EOS) port

Enable the flow control function?

No

Yes

Enable the flow control function

Enable the self study of MAC

Configure another user port?

End

Begin

No

Yes

T AB L E 42 P O R T P R O P E R T Y P AR AM E T E R S O F SE B O AR D

Parameter Description Remarks

Port

1-8 user ports are 10/100 M FE electrical or optical interfaces, with type determined by the board type.

User port 9 is a 1000 M GE optical interface.

VCG (EOS) ports are the system ports, with number determined by the board type.

The configuration related to a port cannot take effect until the port is enabled.

Choose The Speed

Choose the work speed for a port. The VCG (EOS) port has a constant speed of 100 M, which needs no configuration.

Choose The DuplexMode

Choose the work mode for a port. The VCG (EOS) port needs no configuration for this parameter.

The speed and duplex mode of a port should be consistent with those of the abutting equipment.

Flow Control

Flow control is one solution for network congestion. If the system port bandwidth is less than the corresponding user port traffic, enabling flow control for the user port and system port can prevent packet loss. This parameter is optional and is disabled by default.

Flow control and QoS cannot be used at the same time. Once the flow control of a user port is enabled: The flow control should also

be enabled for the port of user equipment which connects to this user port.

The flow control should be

Page 90: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

74 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Parameter Description Remarks

enabled for the corresponding system port simultaneously.

Self Study MAC

Set if the user port supports self-study of MAC address. If this function is disabled, the port has to obtain the destination address via the static MAC address configuration.

It is recommended to enable this function.

Cross Connect Type

Select the cable type of FE electrical port, including three configurations: MDIX Auto, MDIX Constraint, MID Constraint.

Two ports are connected with cable, then, If configured as MDIX Auto,

the ports can self-negotiate with both crossover cable and straight through cable; if configured as MDIX Constraint or MDI Constraint, the ports must be connected with crossover cable; if configured as MDIX and MDI respectively, the ports must be connected with straight through cable.

If the type of cross connect and the type of cable are mismatched, the port will be in linkdown state.

If the speed and the working duplex mode are selected as one of the constraint modes, cross connect type should be configured as constraint MDIX or constraint MDI; if the speed and the working duplex mode are selected as auto mode, the type of cross connect should be configured as MDIX Auto. Otherwise, the service would be influenced.

ii. Set VLAN Mark

For enabled user ports and VCG (EOS) ports, choose the VLAN process modes of the ports and set corresponding parameters on the VLAN Mark page of the Ethernet adapter manager dialog box.

The flowchart of VLAN mark configuration is shown in Figure 48. The parameters and their configuration principles are listed in Table 43.

Page 91: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 75

F I G U R E 48 VL AN M AR K C O N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F SE B O AR D

Choose the QoSPRI

AccessMode

TrunkMode

Configure another port?

End

Begin

No

Choose the Process Mode of VLAN

Input the Pvid

TLSMode

Set theTransparentPortID

Choose the Supportfor Link Transport

State

TransparentMode

Yes

T AB L E 43 P AR AM E T E R S O F VL AN M AR K P AG E O F SE B O AR D

Process Mode of VLAN

Auxiliary Parameters Description Remarks

Access Mode PVID, QoS PRI

The received data frames carry no VLAN ID. They are added with a VLAN layer according to the PVID of this port, and then are exchanged.

The data frames with VLAN ID will be filtered out, and the transmit side will strip the outmost VLAN ID.

Flow control and QoS PRI of a port cannot be set at the same time.

This mode is available when the port is connected with the device which dose not support receiving or transmitting VLAN label, i.e. PC.

TLS Mode PVID, QoS PRI

No matter if the received data frames carry VLAN ID, they will be added with one VLAN layer according to the PVID at the port, and then be exchanged.

The transmit side will strip the outmost VLAN ID.

Flow control and QoS PRI of a port cannot be set at the same time.

This mode is available when VLAN stack (QinQ) is used.

Page 92: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

76 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Process Mode of VLAN

Auxiliary Parameters Description Remarks

Transparent Mode

Transparently transmit Port ID, link Transport State

The received data frames are transparently transmitted to the destination port. Neither of the receive end nor the transmit end processes the VLAN.

Traffic is transmitted between the two ports which have identical transparent transmission port IDs.

Under this mode, the ports should be configured in pairs. The two ports are specified as one pair by IDs. Hence, ID of each transparent port can not conflict with the other ID in one pair. For ZXMP S200, the SE board has the IDs from 1-4; for other devices, the SE boards have the IDs from 1-8.

If “Support for Link Transport State” is enabled, the port can transport the link state.

Trunk Mode -

The received data frames must have VLAN ID, and those with no VLAN ID will be filtered out. The transmit side does not strip VLAN.

This mode is available when the port is connected with the device which is at the convergence point or folk point, also available when the VCG (EOS) ports are connected with each other.

The VLAN Mark settings are valid only for the enabled ports. The bigger the Qos priority value is, the higher the service priority is. SE board only support two kinds of QoS priorities: 1 and 8.

iii. Configure other optional items

In the Ethernet adapter manager dialog box, the QoS Config, Trunk Configuration, Loop Check, Speed Limit, LacpProtocol Attribute, L2 ControlFrame Config and Port Mstp Protocol Attribute pages are all optional. Configure them according to service requirements.

Table 44 describes the optional pages.

Page 93: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 77

T AB L E 44 OP T I O N AL P AG E S I N E T H E R N E T AD AP T E R M AN AG E R D I AL O G B O X O F SE B O AR D

Page Description Remarks

QoS Config Set the QoS state of each port to “Absolutely Priority” or “None”. Absolutely Priority: QoS

function is enabled at the port. When the shared bandwidth of services is insufficient, the system shall guarantee the QoS by sending service with higher priority and meanwhile trying the best to send service with lower priority.

None: QoS function is disabled at the port.

If the flow control has been enabled at a port, the QoS setting of this port is invalid.

For a port employing the access mode or TLS mode, the bigger the “QoS PRI” is, the higher priority does the corresponding service have.

Generally, if the QoS is set to “Absolutely Priority”, it shall cooperate with the speed limit type of “Port+802.1Q” and the limit orient of “Entrance” which shall be configured in the “Speed Limit” page.

Trunk Configuration

The trunk function refers to binding multiple Ethernet physical ports to one logical port so as to increase the bandwidth capacity of the link, evenly distribute data into multiple physical links, and protect links using redundant routes.

All the ports in a Trunk group should have identical port type. The number of ports can be 2, 4, or 8. And the selected ports must be adjacent.

The board will report configuration failure in the EMS if the configuration is incorrect.

Loop Check

Choose if to enable the loopback check function of the VCG (EOS) port. If the loopback check function is enabled: Upon detection of loopback

in SDH path, the related VCG (EOS) port will be automatically disabled so as to prevent data service broadcast storm caused by VCG loopback.

When the loopback is cancelled, the related VCG (EOS) port will automatically return to the status configured in the EMS

It is recommended to enable the loopback check function which is enabled by default.

For ZXMP S200, SE board dose not support the loop check function.

Speed Limit

Limit the speed of “Entrance” or “Out” direction at each port: Speed limit of the “Entrance”

direction: supports speed

Shall be configured only when user has special requirement for speed limit of “Entrance” direction. Generally, it is not

Page 94: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

78 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Page Description Remarks

limit types of “By Port”, “Port+VLAN”, or “Port+802.1Q”; where the latter two types are valid only in the Trunk mode. All of the three types need to be configured with the speed limit and the burst length.

Speed limit of the “Out” direction: only supports the speed limit type of “By Port”, and can be set arbitrarily.

recommended to be configured.For the VCG (EOS) port not configured with speed limit, the default speed limit is consistent with the port’s capacity configuration and can automatically adapt to the LCAS state.

LACP Protocol Attribute

Set LACP protocol attributes including NegotiateMode, TimeoutMode and PortLacpPriority

LACP protocol should be used with Trunk function. Normally, when the LACP function is enabled, the dynamic Trunk group should be configured; or else, the static Trunk group should be configured.

If no necessary, the items in LacpProtocolAttribute page should keep the default settings.

L2 ControlFrame Config

Set the rule of processing L2 control frame, including ProcessRange, L2 ControlFrame Type and ProcessStyle: ProcessRange: the process

range bases on port or board. Select the corresponding ports from the left list box when the process range is based on port. The configuration takes effect only on the selected ports but not on the other non-selected ports. On the other side, when the process range is based on board, the configuration takes effect on all of the ports of the board.

L2 ControlFrame Type: Set the type of frame protocol.

ProcessStyle: Set the process style for the frame, including Same User Service, Block and Pass. Same User Service indicates processing the L2 control frame as processing general user service, that is, the L2 control frame is transferred and processed according to the port mode; Block indicates throwing away the

-

Page 95: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 79

Page Description Remarks

L2 control frame; Pass indicates transferring the L2 control frame without any modification.

Port Mstp Protocol Attribute

Set the attribute of MSTP protocol, including StpPortEnable, StpPortConnectType, StpEdgePort, IdentifySTPFrame and MstZoneSelect. StpPortEnable: It is the

mandatory item. This item indicates if to enable or disable MSTP protocol. The default setting is disabled. Enabled when the port runs MSTP protocol.

StpPortConnectType: It is not a mandatory item. This item indicates that the network connected with the port is point-to-point or share. The default setting is point to pint network. However, if the port is connected to HUB or is working in the half-duplex mode, the share network is recommended.

StpEdgePort: It is not a mandatory item. This item indicates it is a common port or edge port in the network. The default setting is common port. Herein, edge port is the port connected with the other network topology.

IdentifySTPFrame: It is not a mandatory item. This item indicates the frame format is identified by the port. The default setting is IEEE standard format which is recommended when board and board or board and ZTE’s switch are communicated with each other. On the other side, when the board is communicated with the other company’s device, Cisco custom format is recommended. For the different ports with physical connections, the IdentifySTPFrame must be consistent with each other;

The items which are not mandatory should be configured based on the actual network topology.

For a trunk group, the members should have the same configurations.

Page 96: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

80 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Page Description Remarks

otherwise, the communication is obstructed, which will take influence on the topology calculation.

MstZoneSelect: It is not a mandatory item. This item indicates whether the port and the other port are in a same zone. The default setting is auto which is recommended when board and board or board and ZTE’s switch are communicated with each other. The port is configured as constraint (make the port of local in the same zone with the port of the terminal) based on the following two conditions: The port is docked with the other company’s device; The both docking ports have the same domain name, version, instance which are same with the mapping relations of VLAN.

Note: Ethernet adapter manager dialog box can be entered in another way: In the Card Management dialog box of the NE, right-click the SE board to pop up the shortcut menu of SE board. Then click the Ethernet adapter manager menu item.

5. Configure capacity of VCG (EOS) port

In the client operation window, select the NE equipped with SE board. Then click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> VCG Port TS Config. The VCG port capacity config dialog box will pop up. Configure capacity for the VCG (EOS) ports in the dialog box according to the flowchart shown in Figure 49. The parameters are described in Table 45.

Page 97: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 81

F I G U R E 49 CO N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F VCG (EOS) P O R T S O N SE B O AR D

Begin

Choose a VCG (EOS)port

Choose the Time Slot Type

Choose the AU4virtual concatenation

path

Choose the TUG3virtual concatenation

path

Choose the TU12virtual concatenation

path

Choose the PackageType

Choose the LCAS Config mode

Set the Delay Time(optional)

Choose theDirection

Configure another port?

Click the Add button to add one path group

End

VC4

VC3

VC12

Bi-Dir Uni-Dir UnLCAS

No

Yes

T AB L E 45 VCG (EOS) P O R T C AP AC I T Y P AR AM E T E R S O F SE BO AR D

Parameter Description Remarks

Time Slot Type

Choose the timeslot type for VCG group. The SE board supports three kinds of virtual concatenations respectively based on VC4, VC3, and VC12.

Each port only supports one kind of virtual concatenation path group.

Each VCG group can only be configured with one VC4, or one to three VC3s, or one to sixty-three VC12s.

Package Type

Choose the package protocol for Ethernet data frames.

Choose GFP if there is no special requirement.

LCAS Config

Choose the LCAS configuration mode for port, including directional, unidirectional, and un-LCAS.

If the unidirectional is selected, it is necessary to

The bidirectional LCAS is recommended.

The VC4 virtual concatenation path group does not support LCAS since there is only one

Page 98: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

82 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Parameter Description Remarks

enable LCAS for members that are responsible for the receive direction and the send direction respectively.

VC4 in each group.

Delay Time

If the LCAS function is enabled, the delay time of LCAS protection can be configured to prevent LCAS protection from happening with SDH protection simultaneously. In this way, the LCAS protocol will not perform protection immediately upon alarm detection; instead, if alarm still exists after the delay time, it shall perform protection.

The SE board of current version does not support this function.

Note: The VCG port capacity config dialog box can be entered in another way:In the Card Management dialog box of the NE, right-click the SE board to pop up the shortcut menu of SE board. Then click the VCG port capacity config menu item.

6. Configure VLAN and STP

Follow the flowchart shown in Figure 50 to configure VLAN and STP. The parameters are listed in Table 46.

Page 99: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 83

F I G U R E 50 VL AN/STP C O N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F SE BO AR D

Begin

Create a customer

End

Is there any customer?Yes

No

Select the NE, click the menu item SNMS ->Customer Management

CustomerManagement dialog box

Select the NE to be configured with VLAN, select the menu itemDevice Config -> Ethernet Management -> Configure

Virtual LAN with The Data Card

Click the customer

Click the Add VLAN button

Set the VLAN Name andVLAN IDs for the VLAN

added

Click the VLAN added

Add user ports and systemports to the VLAN

Issue and apply thesettings

Enable the STP protocol?

Click the VLAN

Click the BridgeSetbutton

Select the card andenable the STP

No

Yes

Configure Virtual LANwith The Data Card

diaglog box

BridgeSet dialog box

Page 100: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

84 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 46 VLAN/STP C O N F I G U R AT I O N D E S C R I P T I O N O F SE BO AR D

Operation Description Configuration Principles

VLAN configuration

Create a VLAN and add user ports and system port to it. This operation is mandatory.

The SE board can create VLAN with discrete IDs in batch.

The VLAN ID of a port must be identical with the PVID configured for the port in the VLAN Mark page of the Ethernet adapter manager dialog box.

VLAN ID can range from 1 to 4095, and the 4078 to 4095 are reserved which are not recommended for use.

STP configuration

When the Ethernet traffic becomes a ring or mesh network, it is recommended to configure the STP to avoid traffic loop.

(Number of VLANs with STP enabled) ≤ 30

7. Configure the services

i. In the client operation window, select the NE responsible for adding/dropping Ethernet traffic.

ii. Select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.

iii. Establish connection between the VCG path of VCG (EOS) port on SE board and the corresponding path of optical line board using the timeslot cross-connect configuration method.

8. Configure the optical line board of the passed-by site

i. Select the passed-by site icon in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.

ii. Establish pass-through connection with the passed-by optical line board.

Page 101: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 85

Configuration of RPR Ethernet Service The RPR series boards adopt the embedded Resilient Packet Ring (RPR) technology to transmit the Ethernet service. The list of boards is shown in Table 47.

T AB L E 47 RPR S E R I E S B O AR D S

Board Name

Board ID in EMS

System Port Quantity

RPR Port Quantity User Port

Quantity Applicable Equipment

RSEA RSEA RPR SPAN: 2

1 GE (optical interface): 1 FE (electrical interface): 8

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

RSEB-RPR

RSEB RSEB-EOS

VCG (RPR SPAN): 2VCG (EOS): 4(FE) VCG(EOS): 4(FE)+2(GE)

1 GE (optical interface): 2 FE (electrical or optical interface): 8

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390 ZXMP S385

RSEB-RPR

VCG (RPR SPAN): 2VCG (EOS): 4(FE)

RSEB RSEB-EOS

VCG (EOS): 4(FE)+2(GE)

1 GE (optical interface): 2 FE (electrical or optical interface): 4

ZXMP S330 ZXMP S325

Table 48 briefly introduces the ports mentioned in Table 47.

T AB L E 48 RPR P O R T S

Port Function Concatenation Mode

RPR port The Ethernet traffic is accessed to the RPR ring through it. -

RPR SPAN port

The ports connect to two RPR SPAN rings for adding/dropping traffic. The adaptation between RPR data frame and SDH data frame is implemented through them.

VC4 real concatenation

VCG (RPR SPAN) port

The ports connect to two RPR SPAN rings for adding/dropping traffic. The adaptation between RPR data frame and SDH data frame is implemented through them.

VC3 or VC4 virtual concatenation

VCG (EOS) port Implements the cross-ring process of RPR ring traffic, or convergence of

VC12 virtual concatenation

Page 102: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

86 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Port Function Concatenation Mode

Ethernet services. Serving for cross-ring process of

RPR ring traffic, it equals to a user port.

Serving for convergence of Ethernet services, its equals to the VCG system port of SFE/SGE/SE board.

The RPR ring includes two RPR SPAN rings in opposite directions.

[RSEA Card Description]

The RSEA board has two kinds of ports: RPR and RPR SPAN.

[RSEB Card Description]

The RSEA board has three kinds of ports: RPR, VCG (RPR SPAN) and VCG (EOS).

In the EMS, the RSEB board is classified into RSEB-RPR board and RSEB-EOS board according to the VCG port type provided by the board.

The RSEB-RPR board employs the RPR technology to transport traffic, and can provide both kinds of system ports: VCG (RPR SPAN) ports and VCG (EOS) ports.

The RSEB-EOS board employs the EOS technology to transport traffic. It equals to the SFE/SGE/SE board and only provides one kind of system ports: VCG (EOS) ports.

As for hardware, the Ethernet port of RSEB board supports 1000M Ethernet optical interface, 100 M Ethernet optical interface or 10/100 M Ethernet electrical interface. In the EMS, these two kinds of Ethernet interfaces are identified by software/hardware version:

Version 0310: electrical interface

Version 1310: optical interface.

Configuring RSEA Board 1. Install boards other than RSEA board for the NE

In the client operation window, double-click the NE icon to open the Card Management dialog box. Install all the functional boards, as well as optical line board for adding/dropping Ethernet service.

2. Install ESEA boards for the NE

i. In the Card Management dialog box. Click the button representing for RSEA board, the corresponding slot in the simulative subrack turns into yellow.

ii. Click the slot in yellow, which means add the board at this slot.

Page 103: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 87

3. Configure the boards

In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the RSEA board and select the Property menu item from the shortcut menu to enter the Card Property dialog box. And then click the Advanced button to enter the Advanced dialog box.

i. Configure the user ports

On the Data Port Attribute page in the Advanced dialog box, set the property of the user ports according to the flowchart shown in Figure 51. The parameters are listed in Table 49.

F I G U R E 51 US E R P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F RSEA B O AR D

Enable a user port

Input Pvid

Access Mode

Trunk Mode

Set the Self Study MACTrunking Group andCross Connect Type

No

Data Port Attribute page

Configure another user port?

End

Begin

Yes

No

Choose the VLAN Mode

Enable the flow control

Choose the Duplex Mode and Speed

Enable the flow control?

Yes

Enable QoS?

No

Yes

Page 104: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

88 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 49 U S E R P O R T CO N F I G U R AT I O N P AR AM E T E R S O F RSEA B O AR D

Parameters Descriptions Remarks

Port Use State

1-8 ports are 10/100 M Ethernet electrical interfaces, and port 9 is a 1000 M Ethernet optical interface.

The port configuration will not take effect until the port is enabled.

VLAN Mode

Includes the access mode and the trunk mode: Access Mode: The received data frames carry no VLAN ID. They are added with a VLAN layer according to the PVID of this port, and then are exchanged. Trunk Mode: The received data frames must have VLAN ID, and those with no VLAN ID will be filtered out. The transmit side does not strip VLAN.

If the port adopts the access mode, it is necessary to set the port PVID. Port 9 only supports the trunk mode.

Speed Select work speed for the port.

Duplex Mode Select work mode for the port.

The speed of the abutting equipment should comply with the duplex mode.

Pvid In access mode, the port will add VLAN ID to the received data frame.

Value range: 1 to 4095

QoS Property It is identification for Ethernet layer 2 switch

Value range: 1-8, the bigger the value is, the higher the property of the service is.

Flow Control Choose if to use the flow control function. It is disabled by default.

Once the flow control of a user port is enabled, the flow control should also be enabled for the port of user equipment which connects to this user port.

Self StudyMAC

Set if the user port supports self-study of MAC address. If this function is disabled, the port has to obtain the destination address via the static MAC address configuration.

It is recommended to enable this function.

Trunking Group

Bind all the ports with the same physical type to one logical port so as to increase bandwidth capacity of link, evenly distribute data into multiple physical links, and protect links using redundant routes.

It is optional and can be configured according to service requirement.

Page 105: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 89

Parameters Descriptions Remarks

Cross connect type

Select the cable type of FE electrical port, including three configurations: MDIX Auto, MDIX Constraint, MID Constraint.

Two ports are connected with cable, then, If configured as MDIX

Auto, the ports can self-negotiate with both crossover cable and straight through cable; if configured as MDIX Constraint or MDI Constraint, the ports must be connected with crossover cable; If configured as MDIX and MDI respectively, the ports must be connected with straight through cable.

If the type of cross connect and the type of cable are mismatched, the port will be in linkdown state.

If the speed and the working duplex mode are selected as one of the constraint modes, cross connect type should be configured as constraint MDIX or constraint MDI; if the speed and the working duplex mode are selected as auto mode, the type of cross connect should be configured as MDIX Auto. Otherwise, the service would be influenced.

Use default values for parameters not listed in the table.

ii. Configure the RPR port

On the RPR Port Attribute page in the Advanced dialog box, enable the RPR port and set the Protect Type, Revertive Mode, Protect Wait Time, and Wait and Recover Time according to the service networking.

Note: If there is SDH protection in the RPR network, it is recommend to set the Protect Wait Time to 100 ms. If there is only RPR protection, the 0 ms is recommended.

Page 106: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

90 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

iii. Configure the system ports

In the Advanced dialog box, follow the flowchart shown in Figure 52 to configure the VCG (RPR SPAN) ports.

F I G U R E 52 SY S T E M P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F RSEA B O AR D

Delete the original path group

Begin

Create two 155 Mbit/s path groups

Path Group Config page

Set Port Capacity page

Assign the two path groups to two RPR SPAN ports respectively

End

Set Port Capacity page

If the RPR ring network rate is 622 Mbit/s, the capacity of each RPR SPAN port is VC4-4C (622 Mbit/s). RPR SPAN port 1 occupies 1#AUG to 4#AUG, and RPR SPAN port 2 occupies 5#AUG to 8#AUG. AU4-4C concatenation must be set for the AU4 path of the abutting optical line board.

If RPR ring network rate is 155 Mbit/s, the capacity of each RPR SPAN port is VC4 (155 Mbit/s). RPR port 1 occupies 1#AUG, and RPR port 2 occupies 5#AUG. There is no need to set concatenation for the AU4 path of the optical line board.

iv. Set the data board property

On the Data Card Property page in the Advanced dialog box, select the Running Mode and input the MAC Address for the system. The parameters are described in Table 50.

T AB L E 50 RSE A B O AR D P R O P E R T Y P AR A M E T E R S

Running Mode

Options Descriptions Remarks

Default Mode

The port forwards data packets by searching the MAC address table, thus implements the arbitrary switching between user ports and system ports.

It requires that the data frame received at the user port has already carried a VLAN ID.

VLAN Mode

Data frames are forwarded by the assigned VLAN and by searching

It requires that the user port must adopt the access mode.

Page 107: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 91

Running Mode

Options Descriptions Remarks

the MAC address table. Traffic between different VLANs is blocked for the sake of isolation and security.

Only the VLAN data bearing the same PVID as the user port can be forwarded, otherwise they will be filtered out.

MAC Address

Description Remarks

Input the MAC address of the board in HEX format.

MAC address must be unique. By default, each RSEA board installed has a unique MAC address. When setting it manually, the second bit of MAC address cannot be “1”, since the system considers the MAC address with the second bit of “1” as the multicast address.

4. Configure the user isolation

Follow the flowchart shown in Figure 53 to configure the user isolation.

Note: The VLAN IDs of different users can be identical, but the VLAN IDs of the same user cannot be identical.

Page 108: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

92 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 53 US E R I S O L AT I O N C O N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F RSEA B O AR D

Begin

Create a customer

End

Is there any customer?Yes

No

Select the NE, click the SNMS -> CustomerManagement menu item

Customer Managementdialog box

Select a node in RPR ring network, click the Device Config ->Ethernet Management -> Client Domain menu item

Click the customer

Apply and issue thesettings

选择单板,启用STP

Client Domaindialog box

网桥属性对话框

Assign user ports to the customer

Select the same node in RPR ring network, click the DeviceConfig -> Ethernet Management -> RPR VLAN Domain

menu item

Click the samecustomer

RPR VLAN Domaindialog box

Click the Add VLAN button

Set VLAN ID for the VLANadded

Click the VLAN added

Apply and issue thesettings

Assign user ports tothe VLAN

5. Configure services

i. Select a node and the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> RPR Ethernet Service Attribute, to set the

Page 109: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 93

attribute of RPR service for the VLAN classified in step 3 in the pop-up dialog box.

The RPR traffic is classified into three types depending on the QoS: type A, B, and C, with priorities of A>B>C.

Type A

Auxiliary parameters: Max BW and Reserved BW, where BW refers to bandwidth.

The traffic of type A shares the reserved bandwidth in RPR ring. Even in case of idleness, this bandwidth cannot be occupied by traffic of other types. If type A traffic exceeds the upper limit of the bandwidth, all of them will be discarded. It is not controlled by the fairness algorithm, and has invariable rates. The delay and jitter effect on them is the smallest.

It is applicable to analog Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) traffic.

Type B

Auxiliary parameters: Max BW and Min BW, where BW refers to bandwidth.

Type B traffic is classified into B-type CIR traffic and B-type EIR traffic.

The B-type CIR traffic occupies guaranteed bandwidth and are not controlled by the fairness algorithm. When the bandwidth is idle, it can be occupied by other traffic.

The B-type EIR traffic occupies bandwidth between the limited bandwidth and the guaranteed bandwidth, which can be shared with other nodes, and it is controlled by the fairness algorithm.

It is applicable to traffic which is insensitive to delay but requires bandwidth guarantee. For example, some data traffic with high requirement can occupy more bandwidth when there is idle bandwidth.

Type C

Auxiliary parameters: Max BW, where BW refers to bandwidth.

The traffic of type C is processed in an attempt, which has no bandwidth guarantee and is controlled by the fairness algorithm. When the traffic exceeds the bandwidth limit, it will be discarded completely. It has a large delay and jitter.

It is applicable to data services with lower requirements.

Note: One VLAN can only have one traffic type, and different VLANs can have identical traffic type.

ii. Select a node in the RPR ring and the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config.

Page 110: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

94 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

In the Service Config dialog box, establish the connection between the SPAN port of the RSEA board and the optical line board according to the timeslot cross-connect configuration method.

The two SPAN ports should be connected to two optical line boards respectively.

Note:

The VC4 paths occupied by two RPR SPAN ports should respectively connect with two optical line boards.

If the rate of RPR ring network is 622 Mbit/s, i.e. the rate of path group at RPR SPAN port is 622 Mbit/s, the AU4 path of the abutting optical line board should be configured with AU4-4C real concatenation.

6. Configure the optical line boards for the passed-by node

In the client operation window, select a passed-by site and click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config.

In the Service Config dialog box, establish the pass-through connection for the passed-by optical line board.

Note: If the rate of path group at RPR SPAN port is 622 Mbit/s, the AU4 paths of the passed-by optical line boards should be configured with AU4-4C real concatenation.

Configuring RSEB-RPR Board When the RPR technology is adopted to transmit the Ethernet service, the user ports and VCG (EOS) ports are all located at the user side.

Generally, the user port accesses Ethernet traffic directly, and the VCG (EOS) port serves for connection with the system port of smart Ethernet series boards (SFE/SGE). After L2 layer switching, the traffic pass through the RPR system port to enter the RPR ring network.

The RSEB-RPR board provides RPR port, VCG (RPR SPAN) port, user port, and VCG (EOS) port. The configuration procedure is described below:

1. Install boards for an NE

Double-click an NE icon in the client operation window to enter the Card Management dialog box. Install the RSEB-RPR board, necessary functional boards, and optical line boards for adding/dropping Ethernet traffic.

Page 111: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 95

Caution: When installing RSEB-RPR board, the software/hardware version cannot be modified in the Card property dialog box unless the Presetting has been selected. Therefore, make sure to check the Presetting check box. The RSEB-RPR electrical interface board of version 0310 is installed by default.

2. Configure the RPR port

i. In the Card Management dialog box, double-click the RSEB-RPR board to pop up the Card Property dialog box. Then click the Advanced button to enter the Advanced dialog box.

ii. On the RPR Port Attribute page in the dialog box, enable the RPR port.

iii. Set the other properties of the RPR port as per actual need. Generally, the default setting of RPR port is adopted.

3. Configure the board property on the Data Card Property page of the Advanced dialog box. Refer to Table 41 for parameter descriptions.

4. Configure the VCG (EOS) ports and the user ports

i. In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the RSEB-RPR board to pop up the shortcut menu. Click the Ethernet adaptor manager menu item.

ii. On the PortProperty page of the Ethernet adaptor manager dialog box, set the attributes for ports according to the flowchart shown in Figure 46 and Figure 47.

Note:

The types and quantities of VCG (EOS) ports and of user ports are determined by the board type.

In the EMS, the last two user ports of RSEB-RPR board are 1000 M optical interfaces, and the others are 10/100 M electrical interfaces.

5. Configure the VLAN mark

On the VLAN Mark page of the Ethernet adaptor manager dialog box, set the VLAN mark according to the flowchart shown in Figure 48.

6. Set capacities for the system ports

i. In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the RSEB-RPR board to pop up the shortcut menu. Click the VCG port capacity config menu item.

ii. Set the capacities for the VCG (RPR SPAN) ports and the VCG (EOS) ports according to the flowchart shown in Figure 49.

Note:

Page 112: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

96 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The VCG at the VCG (EOS) port adopts the VC12 virtual concatenation, and the maximum total bandwidth is determined by the equipment type. Generally, the LCAS function is enabled.

The VCG at the VCG (RPR SPAN) port adopts the VC3 or VC4 virtual concatenation, and the maximum total bandwidth is determined by the equipment type. The bandwidths of two VCG (RPR SPAN) ports must be identical. Generally, the LCAS function is disabled.

VCG (RPR SPAN) ports and VCG (EOS) ports share the bandwidth at the system side.

Generally, the default package type of GFP and the default delay time of 0 ms are adopted.

7. Configure the VLAN and STP

Follow the configuration flowchart shown in Figure 50 to configure the VLAN and STP.

Note:

The VLAN configuration is mandatory, which involves user ports, VCG (EOS) ports, and RPR ports. Among which, the VLAN ID of a user port or VCG (EOS) port must be consistent with the port’s Pvid set in the Ethernet adaptor manager dialog box.

The STP configuration is optional.

8. Configure the RPR service

i. In the client operation window, select an NE in the RPR ring network. Click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> RPR Ethernet Service Attribute.

ii. Set the service type

Refer to corresponding description in the section of Configuring RSEA Board.

iii. Set the Port-Ring Select Mode, which supports automatic selection, manual selection, and forced selection.

Automatic selection

The RPR traffic selects the shortest path of the port ring for transmission automatically. The shortest path is determined by the hopping number of the site looping from ring 0 (SPAN 1) and ring 1 (SPAN 2) to each site in the ring network.

Manual or forced selection

Sets the RPR traffic to run on ring 0 (SPAN 1) or ring 1 (SPAN 2) forcedly.

Generally, the manual selection mode is applied to the traffic of type C which has no requirement for the guarantee bandwidth, so as to obtain the maximum network bandwidth.

Page 113: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 97

Note: When steering protection occurs in the RPR ring network, manual selection is disabled automatically to avoid traffic interruption.

iv. Set the MAC address of a static destination site

By default, the RSEB board learns RPR address and MAC address automatically.

Note: With the static MAC address adopted, RPR traffic can only be transmitted among the designated MAC addresses in the RPR ring network without RPR exchange. It is usually applicable to the point-to-point traffic.

9. Configure services

i. Select the NE and click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config.

ii. In the Service Config dialog box, use the timeslot cross-connect configuration method to establish connections between the RSEB-RPR board and the optical line board, or between the RSEB-RPR board and the SFE/SGE/SE board.

Note:

VCG (RPR SPAN) port 1 of a RSEB board must be connected to VCG (RPR SPAN) port 2 of another RSEB board, and vice versa.

The VCG (RPR SPAN) ports must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the traffic shall be blocked and the alarm of fiber connection error will be raised.

The VCG (EOS) port of RSEB board is usually connected with the system port of SFE/SGE/SE board.

10. Configure the optical line boards of the passed-by site

i. In the client operation window, select a passed-by site. Click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config.

ii. In the Service Config dialog box, establish pass-through connection with the passed-by optical line board.

Page 114: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

98 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Tip: The Ethernet adapter manager and the VCG port capacity config dialog box can also be entered by clicking the corresponding menu items extended in the Device Config -> Ethernet Management menu.

Configuring RSEB-EOS Board The RSEB-EOS board transmits Ethernet services with EOS technology, with the principle similar to that of the smart Ethernet boards (SFE/SGE/SE board).

It provides VCG (EOS) port and user port. The configuration procedure is described below.

1. Install boards for an NE

Double-click an NE icon in the client operation window to enter the Card Management dialog box and install the RSEB-EOS board, necessary functional boards, and optical line boards for adding/dropping Ethernet traffic.

Caution: When installing RSEB-EOS board, the software/hardware version cannot be modified in the Card property dialog box unless the Presetting has been selected. Therefore, make sure to check the Presetting check box. The RSEB-EOS electrical interface board of version 0310 is installed by default.

2. Configure the board property

i. In the Card Management dialog box, double-click the RSEB-EOS board to pop up the Card Property dialog box. Then click the Advanced button to enter the Advanced dialog box.

ii. Configure the board property on the Data Card Property page of the Advanced dialog box according to actual need. Refer to Table 41 for parameter descriptions. Generally, the default settings are adopted.

3. Configure the VCG (EOS) ports and the user ports

i. In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the RSEB-EOS board and select Ethernet adaptor manager in the short menu to pop up Ethernet adaptor manager dialog box.

ii. On the PortProperty page, set the attributes for ports according to the flowchart shown in Figure 46 and Figure 47.

Note: The types and quantities of VCG (EOS) ports and of user ports are determined by the board type.

4. Configure the VLAN mark

Page 115: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 99

On the VLAN Mark page of the Ethernet adaptor manager dialog box, set the VLAN mark according to the flowchart shown in Figure 48.

5. Set capacities for the VCG (EOS) ports

i. In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the RSEB-EOS board to pop up the shortcut menu. Click the VCG port capacity config menu item.

ii. Set the capacities for the VCG (EOS) ports according to the flowchart shown in Figure 49.

Note:

The VCG at the VCG (EOS) port adopts the VC12 virtual concatenation, and the maximum total bandwidth is determined by the equipment type. Generally, the LCAS function is enabled.

Generally, the default package type of GFP and the default delay time of 0 ms are adopted.

6. Configure the VLAN and STP

Follow the configuration flowchart shown in Figure 50 to configure the VLAN and STP.

Note:

The VLAN configuration is mandatory.

The STP configuration is optional.

7. Configure services

i. In the client operation window, select the NE to be configured and click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config.

ii. In the Service Config dialog box, establish the connection between the TU12 path of the RSEB-EOS board and the TU12 path of the optical line board according to the timeslot cross-connect configuration method.

8. Configure optical line boards for the passed-by site

i. In the client operation window, select a passed-by site and select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config.

ii. In the Service Config dialog box, establish pass-through connection with the passed-by optical line board.

Page 116: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

100 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Tip: The Ethernet adapter manager and the VCG port capacity config dialog box can also be entered by clicking the corresponding menu items extended in the Device Config -> Ethernet Management menu.

Configuring MPLS Ethernet Service [Introduction]

MPLS Ethernet processing board is employed in access layer or convergence layer of Metropolitan Area Network (MAN). The Ethernet message is processed via the flow method. The board supports multi switch method including MPLS, VLAN, etc., meanwhile, provides virtual bridge function and guarantees the quality of point to point service. Hence, it is one of the important boards to construct virtual private line (VPL) and virtual private network (VPN). The SE boards are listed in Table 51.

T AB L E 51 MPLS E T H E R N E T S E R V I C E B O AR D S

Board Name and Combination

Board Name and Version in EMS

User Port Quantity

VCG (EOS) Port Quantity

Applicable Equipment

MSEA + EIFEx8 MSE (0310) GE (Optical) : 2 FE (Electrical) : 8

VCG : 64 ZXMP S385

MSEA + OIS1x8 MSE (1310) GE (Optical) : 2 FE (Optical) : 8

VCG : 64 ZXMP S385

MSEB + EIFEx8 MSE (0320) GE (Optical) : 2 FE (Electrical) : 8

VCG : 64 ZXMP S385

MSEB + OIS1x8 MSE (1320) GE (Optical) : 2 FE (Electrical) : 8

VCG : 64 ZXMP S385

MSE board divides into MSEA and MSEB. MSEA supports Ethernet Virtual Private LAN (EVPLAN) but MSEB does not support EVPLAN. In EMS, select software/hardware version to differentiate MSE and FE interface types whose configurations are similar.

User port can be configured as user Ethernet port or MPLS Ethernet port via EMS. User Ethernet port of this board, which is same with those of other boards, is used to access Ethernet service; MPLS Ethernet port is used to access Ethernet service carrying with MPLS label.

Page 117: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 101

VCG port can be configured as VCG (EOS) port or VCG (GFP MPLS) port. VCG (EOS) port, which is same with those of other boards, is used to connect with SDH side; VCG (GFP MPLS) port is used to connect with the Ethernet service carrying with MPLS label. The service path is VCG path, and the message format is GFP+MPLS label+ Normal Ethernet Message.

MPLS Ethernet processing board accesses or converges the distributed service to the trunk network or backbone network, then classifies the service by flow, identifies the object address, controls the speed, schedules and shapes the service. Following, transports the service by Ethernet port or by the SONET/SDH ports after encapsulated via GFP/HDLC/X.86 protocol.

MSEA board supports EVPLAN, Ethernet Private Line (EPL) and Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL). MSEB board supports EPL and EVPL. Hereinafter, MSE represents MSEA and MSEB.

Configuring EPL Service EPL is a point to point service which transparently transports Ethernet service from point to point, does not perform layer 2 switch and self-study MAC address. EPL service of each user is carried via private SDH path, which indicates the user occupies the bandwidth of its SDH path alone.

EPL service is configured on MSE board by configuring the two ports of MSE board in pair; therefore, the service is transparently transported between the two ports.

[Steps]

1. Installing the board

Double-click the NE icon in the client operation window to open the Card Management dialog box. Then, install necessary functional boards, optical line board and MSE board which can add/drop Ethernet traffic.

Note:

The software/hardware version cannot be modified in the Card property dialog box unless the Presetting has been selected. Therefore, make sure to check the Presetting check box.

The version of software/hardware should be consistent; the corresponding relations with the actual board are listed in Table 51.

2. Configure the property

Right-click the MSE board in the Card Management dialog box, and select Property in the shortcut menu to enter the Card Property dialog box. The properties of MSE board are list in Table 52.

Page 118: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

102 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 52 P R O P E R T I E S O F MSE B O AR D

Option Description Remark

Working mode

Port No. , Working mode, Setting mode and AUG List

The default setting is recommended and can not be modified randomly.

TPID

TPID is the ID which identifies the outmost VLAN layer. It has two options: 0x8100 and 0x88A8. TPID of the local device should be consistent with the TPID of the docking device. TPID + VLAN ID can implement the VLAN extended function, where the TPID and VLAN ID must be the same as those of the docking port. The item can be modified when presetting the attributes or the board not-in-position. If no special necessary, the default setting is recommended.

Set MAC Aging Value range: 1-30000. If no special necessary, the default setting is recommended.

Jumbo Configuration

If the setting is “Support”, the board supports the frame length from 64 byte to 9216 byte; if the setting is “No Support”, the board supports the frame length up to 1518 byte. If no special necessary, the default setting is recommended.

OSPF Protocol Enable

If the setting is “Enable”, the board supports auto LSP and static LSP; if the setting is “Disable”, the board only supports static LSP. If no special necessary, the default setting is recommended.

OSPF domain ID IDs of all nodes in one OSPF network domain must same with each other. If no special necessary, the default setting is recommended.

Domain authentication type

If the setting is “Simple authentication”, the password of the port should be set in the MPLS Port Attr Page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog box. Only the ports with same password can communicate with each other. Otherwise, neither the communication nor auto LSP can be established.

If the setting is “Not authentication”, it is not necessary to set the password.

If no special necessary, the default setting is recommended.

RSVP refresh time Set the RSVP refresh time, If no special necessary, the default setting is recommended.

Data Board Property

Hello interval Set hello interval between the two communicating sides, If no special necessary, the default setting is recommended.

Router ID Set the IP address of the board. It is a mandatory item. Router ID of each segment is 1-255. Router ID in one network must be different. MPLS

Port Set

Port type Set MPLS port attributes according to the requirement of service; the user port can be set as User Ethernet

Page 119: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 103

Option Description Remark

port or MPLS Ethernet port; VCG port can be set as VCG (EOS) port or VCG (GFP MPLS) port. User Ethernet port: accessing Ethernet service,

which is same with the user ports of other Ethernet board;

MPLS Ethernet port: accessing the Ethernet service carrying MPLS label. The message format is Ethernet MAC + MPLS label + Normal Ethernet Message

VCG (EOS) port: connecting to SDH side, which is same with the VCG (EOS) port of the other Ethernet board.

VCG (GFP MPLS) port: accessing the Ethernet service carrying MPLS label, the service is carried by VCG path, and the message format is GFP + MPLS label + Normal Ethernet Message.

MPLS port must be configured while installing the board. After the board installation, the setting of MPLS port can only be viewed but not be modified.

3. Configure user port/MPLS port

In the client operation window, select the NE equipped with SE board. Click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> Ethernet adapter manager. The configuration includes the following items.

i. Configure the properties of the port

Enable and configure user ports and MPLS ports on the PortProperty page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog box. The configuration flowchart of user ports is shown in Figure 54. The parameters and configuration principles are listed in Table 53.

Page 120: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

104 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 54 CO N F I G U R AT I O N FL O W C H AR T O F U S E R P O R T S

Enable the user port

Select the duplex mode

Select the speed

Select cross-connect type

If configure another user port?

End

Start

No

Yes

T AB L E 53 P AR AM E T E R S AN D C O N F I G U R AT I O N P R I N C I P L E S

Parameter Description Remark

Port

User port is set as MPLS Ethernet port or user Ethernet port according to the accessed service.

The physical interface type of user port id decided by the type of board. Herein, 1-8 user ports are 10/100 M FE electrical interfaces or optical interfaces, 9-10 user ports are 1000 M GE optical interface.

Only if the port is “Start”, the correlative settings are valid.

Choose The Speed

Select the working speed for port.

Choose The Duplex

Select the working mode for port.

The speed and duplex mode of a port should be consistent with those of the docking equipment.

Cross Connect Type

Select the cable type of FE electrical port, including three configurations: MDIX Auto, MDIX Constraint, MID Constraint.

Two ports are connected with cable, then, If configured as MDIX Auto,

the ports can self-negotiate with both crossover cable and straight through cable; if configured as MDIX Constraint or MDI Constraint, the ports must be connected with crossover cable; if configured as MDIX and MDI respectively, the

Page 121: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 105

Parameter Description Remark

ports must be connected with straight through cable.

If the type of cross connect and the type of cable are mismatched, the port will be in linkdown state.

If the speed and the working duplex mode are selected as one of the constraint modes, cross connect type should be configured as constraint MDIX or constraint MDI; if the speed and the working duplex mode are selected as auto mode, the type of cross connect should be configured as MDIX Auto. Otherwise, the service would be influenced.

In PortProperty page, “Flow Control “and Self Study MAC” can not be set.

ii. Configure MPLS Port Attribute

In the MPLS Port Attr page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog box, enable MPLS port and set the attributes.

The parameters and configuration principles are listed in Table 54.

T AB L E 54 P AR AM E T E R S AN D C O N F I G U R AT I O N P R I N C I P L E S O F MPLS P O R T (MSE B O AR D )

Parameters Descriptions Remark

Port The port with MPLS attributes

The port with MPLS can be set as User Ethernet port or VCG (GFP MPLS) port. The board supports 48 VCG (GFP MPLS) ports by default which should be set during installing the board. Refer to the installation of the board for the setting.

Port IP Port IP address of MPLS port

IP address of MPLS port that the service passes by must be configured; moreover, the IP address must be unique in the whole net. For example, a LSP passes VCG (GFP MPLS) port 1, the IP address of the port must be configured then.

On the other side, for the MPLS port that no service passes by, it is suggested that the IP address should not be configured.

Page 122: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

106 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Parameters Descriptions Remark

Port Cost

Routing cost of the port which is used when calculating the routing. For the port with service, it is suggested that the port cost should not be modified.

For auto LSP, it is prior to be established on the physical path which has the rather lower port cost.

Port OSPF Protocol

Enable or disable the port OSPF protocol. The default setting is recommended.

Enable OSPF if the LSP is established based on the protocol.

OSPF Port Type

Set the OSPF port type, only PeerToPeer type is supported, the default setting is recommended.

-

Port Traff Project

Enable or disable the port traffic project

After the port traffic project is disabled, Expedited Forwarding (EF) and Assured Forwarding (AF) can not be established. It is suggest that the PortTraffProject be enabled for the path with service.

Interval Between Resend OSPF Ctrl Frame

Set the interval between resend OSPF control frames, the default setting is recommended.

-

Interval Between Hello Frame

Set the interval between Hello frames, the default setting is recommended.

This setting of the port should be same with that of the connecting port; otherwise, the protocol would be interrupted.

Survive Time of Port

Set the survive time of the port. The default setting is recommended.

The setting of the port should be same with that of the connecting port.

Confirm Port Password

Confirm the password of the port for authenticating the routing protocol.

In the Data Card Property page of Advanced.. dialog box of the board property, if the domain authentication type is Simple authentication, this item must be configured then.

The setting of the port should be same with that of the connecting port.

MAC Addr of MPLS Seal Dest

Set MAC address of MPLS seal destination

If the port is connected to MPLS Ethernet port of the other board, this item must be set as the MAC address of the other board. Otherwise, it is no necessary to set this item.

Page 123: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 107

iii. Configure VLAN mark

In the VLAN Mark page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog box, select the VLAN processing mode for user port and VCG port. Because MSE board only supports the trunk mode, so the settings in this page keep in default.

iv. Configure the other items

Loop Check page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog box is an optional page. The configurations are according to the service requirements.

The introductions of Loop Check page are listed in Table 55.

T AB L E 55 C O N F I G U R AT I O N S O F L O O P CH E C K P AG E

Page Description Remark

Loop Check

Detecting the loop of VCG (EOS) port. Only when the VCG (EOS) port detects that the first activation timeslot is looped, the VCG (EOS) port would be closed.

If the VCG (EOS) port is closed, which MSE board can not detect, meanwhile, EMS has no correlative alarm information.

The loop detect is invalid when other timeslots are looped except the first activation timeslot.

Currently, MSE board does not support Trunk configuration, LACP protocol and L2 control frame configuration.

Tip: Another way to get into Ethernet adapter manager dialog box is:

Right-click MSE board in the Board Management dialog box, select the Ethernet adapter manager in the shortcut menu.

4. Configure VCG port capacity

In the client operation window, select an NE equipped with MSE board; click the menu item Device Config-> Ethernet Management-> VCG Port TS Config to configure VCG (GFP MPLS) port capacity and VCG (EOS) port capacity. The flowchart of configuration is shown in Figure 55, the descriptions of parameter are listed in Table 56.

Page 124: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

108 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 55 FL O W C H AR T O F C O N F I G U R I N G VCG (GFP MPLS) P O R T CAP AC I T Y AN D VCG (EOS) P O R T C AP AC I T Y (MSE B O AR D ) )

T AB L E 56 P AR AM E T E R D E S C R I P T I O N S O F VCG P O R T CAP AC I T Y

Parameters Descriptions Remarks

Time Slot Type

Select the timeslot type of VCG. MSE board supports three levels of virtual concatenations: VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12.

One port supports only one level of virtual concatenation at a time;

Each VCG can configure 8 VC-4s or 24 VC-3s or 63 VC-12s at most.

The maximum capacity at system side is 16 VC-4s. Only the VC-12s in AU1-AU4 are available. The number of VC-12 in all VCG port must be less than 252 totally.

Package Type

Select GFP as the encapsulation protocol of Ethernet frame

Currently, MSE board only supports GFP protocol

Page 125: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 109

Parameters Descriptions Remarks

LCAS Config

Select the type of LCAS configuration, including Bi-Dir, Uni-Dir and Non-LCAS. For Uni-Dir type, the timeslots which are enabled LCAS function should be set at both the receiving direction and sending direction.

If the type of LCAS Config is not Non-LCAS, MSE board supports if to activate the

added time slots. If the time slots are not activated, which means the path on the time slot can not be used.

MSE board does not support to cancel the time slots. For example, five LCAS time slots are configured in one VCG group. The only way of cancelling two of them is to deactivate these two time slots; If these two timeslots are also wanted by the other VCG group, the VCG group which these two time slots originally belongs to must be cancelled, then a new VCG group must be configured. Otherwise, the configuration will be failed.

Delay Time

If LCAS is enabled, in order to avoid the LCAS protection and SDH protection works at the same time, the LCAS delay time must be set. When an alarm happens, LCAS protocol does not take effect until the alarm is still existed after a delay time.

The item is invalid if the LCAS Config is Non-LCAS.

Currently, MSE board does not support this function.

Note: Go to VCG port capacity config dialog box by another way:

In the Board Management dialog box, right-click MSE board and select VCG port capacity config in the shortcut menu.

5. Configure EPL

i. In the client operation window, select an NE equipped with MSE board, click the menu item Device config-> Ethernet Management-> EPL Config to go to EPL Config dialog box.

ii. Click New.. button to go to New EPL dialog box.

iii. Input EPL ID and name.

iv. Enable Link Status Transparent (LST) according to the requirement.

Note: If LST is enabled, when the system port of the board recieves Custome Signal Failure (CSF) or Loss of Frame Delineation (LFD) , the connections of user port in this EPL group will be link down constraintly. Till CSF or LFD is disappeared, the connections are linked up again.

Page 126: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

110 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

v. For MSEB board, “If Stream Control” is enabled or disabled according to the requirements. For MSEA board, “If Stream Control” takes the default setting which is “Disable”, that means the MSEA board does not support “Stream Control” currently.

vi. In the board selecting list box at the left of the dialog box, double-click the MSE board to be configured.

vii. In the port selecting list box at the right of the dialog box, double click to select a user port and a system port which are configured in pair.

viii. Click Add button to add the configured EPL service.

ix. Repeat the step i to step viii to add other EPL services.

x. Click Apply button to confirm the configured EPL service.

xi. Click Close button to close the New EPL dialog box and return to Epl Config dialog box.

xii. Click Apply button to send the configurations.

xiii. Click Close button to close Epl Config dialog box.

6. Configure service

In the client operation window, select the NEs which are adding/dropping service, and then click the menu item Device Config-> SDH Management -> Service Config to pop up Service Config dialog box. In the Service Config dialog box, establish the connections between VCG paths of MSE board and the corresponding paths of optical line board.

7. Configure the passed-by optical line board

In the client operation window, select the passed-by site; click the menu item Device Config-> SDH Management -> Service Config to pop up Service Config dialog box. In the Service config dialog box, establish the pass-through connection of the passed-by optical line board.

Configuring EVPL Service EVPL is a point to point service. The difference from EPL is that different users can share the link bandwidth. MSE board adopts MPLS L2 VPN to achieve the EVPL service which means to establish a simulative service between different MSE boards in one VPN. Each MSE board which is also called Virtual Forwarded Instance (VFI) is a node in the VPN. The VFI does not support L2 switch and self-study MAC address, that is, the Ethernet service enters into the Label Switched Path (LSP) directly.

[Steps]

1. Configure the properties of the board

Port properties and VCG port capacity are according to the step 1-step 4 described in Configuring EPL Service.

Page 127: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 111

2. Establish LSP

i. In the client operation window, select an NE equipped with MSE board, and then click the menu item Device Config-> Ethernet Management -> LSP Set to pop up LSP Set dialog box.

ii. Click New.. button to go to New LSP dialog box.

iii. Establish LSP based on Figure 56 and Table 57.

F I G U R E 56 WO R K F L O W O F E S T AB L I S H I N G T H E LSP (MSE B O AR D )

Page 128: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

112 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 57 P AR AM E T E R D E S C R I P T I O N S O F E S T AB L I S H I N G LSP (MSE BO AR D )

Parameters Descriptions Remarks

LSP Name LSP name in EMS -

LSP ID LSP identifier in EMS LSP ID in one node is unique.

Config Mode

Configuration modes of LSP, including Static Route Config, auto and Half Auto. Static Route Config: In this mode, user

should specify all of the LSP parameters including QoS attributes, peak speed, burst length, source/destination node, output port and label of source node, input port and label of destination node, input/output port and label of the middle node.

auto: In this mode, user just needs to specify QoS attributes, peak speed, burst length and source/destination node, except any input/output label of node and the middle node which will be set by the protocol automatically,

Half Auto: In this mode, user needs to specify QoS attributes, peak speed, burst length, source/destination node and the middle node, except any input/output label which is set by the protocol automatically.

The differentiation of auto mode and Half Auto mode is that the Half Auto mode must configure all of the passed-by nodes of LSP, but auto mode just configures the source and destination node.

QoS Property

QoS property, including (Enhanced Forwarded) EF, (Assured Forwarded) AF and (Best Effort) BE EF: called as A class service, enhanced

forward the service to guarantee the Committed Information Rate (CIR) of service.

AF: called as B class service, guarantee the maximum speed of the service is CIR, take the best effort to forward service whose speed is beyond CIR. However, the maximum speed of service should not be over Peak Information Rate (PIR).

BE: called as C class service, take the best effort to forward the service.

The sequence of priority of the service is EF, AF, BE. The priority of EF is the highest.

Peak Speed The maximum bandwidth of LSP, the minimum peak speed is 64kbit/s, the maximum peak speed is 1250000 kbit/s.

-

Pledge Speed

The minimum bandwidth of LSP. Only AF service can pledge the speed and the peak speed.

When the network is blocked, CIR of AF service can be guaranteed, but the bandwidth of PIR maybe occupied by the services with higher or equivalent priority.

Page 129: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 113

Note: In the Router Table list box, the input label and output label of the border two lines must be same with each other. Cancell the middle node will make the labels inconsistent. At that time, click Compute Outlabel button to let the labels consistent again.

iv. Click Apply button to save LSP configuration

v. Repeat step iii and step iv to establish another LSP.

vi. Click Close button to close the New LSP dialog box and return to LSP Set dialog box.

vii. Click Apply button in LSP Set dialog box to send LSP configuration.

viii. Click Close button in LSP Set dialog box to exit LSP Set dialog box.

3. If the VPN with Tag mode is wanted, configure the VLAN based on the work flow described in Figure 50.

4. Establish VPN

i. In the client operation window, select the NE equipped with MSE board; click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> VPN CONFIG to go to the VPN Config dialog box.

ii. Click New...button to go to New VPN dialog box. The parameter descriptions are listed in Table 58.

T AB L E 58 P A R AM E T E R D E S C R I P T I O N S O F E S T AB L I S H I N G N E W LSP (MSE B O AR D )

Parameters Descriptions Remark

VPN Name The name of VPN -

Service ID The ID of service

Service ID and Client ID compose of VPN ID, VPN ID must be unique in the whole net.

Client ID can be all 0, the last two bytes of Client ID of any two VPNs can not be identical.

Client ID The ID of client

Traffic type

The type of Ethernet service, including Evplan and Evpl, here Evpl is needed.

-

Work Mode The work mode of VPN, including Raw and Tag

Raw, a transparent transmission mode. In this mode, the board port does not identify VLAN tag and just transparently transmits the VLAN tag;

Tag, a tag mode, in this mode, the board processes VLAN tag according to port+VLAN.

Auto Find Topology auto find, If selecting Multi2Multi, user just

Page 130: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

114 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Parameters Descriptions Remark

including Multi2Multi, one2Multi and forbid. Currently, the board supports Multi2Multi and forbid. However, for Tag mode, this item should be forbidden.

specifies the board and port involved in the service; other configurations are established automatically by the board. MSEA board supports VPN Auto Find of Raw mode of EVPL/EVPLAN; MSEB board supports VPN Auto Find of Raw mode of EVPL.

Central IP

The IP address of central node, there is no necessary to configure this item.

The item takes effect in case of Evplan and one2Multi.

iii. Click Apply button to confirm the VPN configurations, then Click Close button to return to VPN Config dialog box.

iv. Click Apply button in VPN Config dialog box to forward the VPN configurations.

5. Establish VFI/VSI (for instance, the VPN under Raw working mode)

Establishing VFI/VSI of VPN under Tag working mode refers to the step 5 described in Configuring EVPLAN Service.

i. Select a VPN in VPN Config dialog box and click VFI/VSI button to go to VFI Config dialog box.

ii. Input VSI name, click New VFI/VSI and Select board in the

LogResource list box, Click button to add the board to VFI list box.

iii. Repeat step ii to add another MSE board to VFI list box, as shown in Figure 57.

Page 131: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 115

F I G U R E 57 VF I C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X (EVPL S E R V I C E) (1 )

iv. In VFI list box, click a board and the corresponding ports are displayed in LogResource list box. Select the wanted port and

click to add the port to VFI list box.

v. Repeat step iv to add the port of another MSE board to VFI list box, as shown in Figure 58.

Page 132: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

116 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 58 VF I C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X (EVPL S E R V I C E) (2 )

Note: If configured with EPL, EVPL or EVPLAN service, the port will not show in the LogResource list box. For the VPN under Raw mode, if configured with VLAN, the port will not show in LogResource list box too.

vi. Click Apply button to forward VFI configurations. If the Auto Find in Establish VPN is Multi2Multi, go to 7. Configure the service directly.

Note: For the VPN supporting Multi2Multi, the following VFI/VSI Attribute Config, New PW and Binding LSP can be automatically completed by the board but not by manually.

vii. Click Property button to go to the Local Bind Label page of VFI/VSI Attribute Config dialog box.

viii. Modify the Config Mode as Static Config, and input the local bind label whose value is from 16 to 4095. The parameters in other pages keep the default settings.

Page 133: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 117

Note: Currently, because the board does not support Auto Config mode, so the loca bind label should be set by manually, moreover, the local bind label must be unique in one board.

ix. Click Apply button to forward the configurations.

x. Click Close button to close VCI/VSI Attribute Config dialog box, and return to the VFI Config dialog box.

6. Establish New Pseudo Wire (PW) and Binding LSP

i. Click PW button in VFI Config dialog box to go to PW window.

ii. Click New.. button to go to New PW and Binding LSP dialog box.

iii. Select VFI port.

iv. Select the port type which is same with the type selected in 5. Establish VFI/VSI , and then the right list box displays the port number. For example, select User Ethernet port in

v. Figure 58, here also select the User Ethernet Port.

vi. Set PwID which is unique for each board. The default setting is recommended.

vii. Select COS (that is class of service) attribute. If VFI/VSI port is under the Raw mode, here “By Port” should be selected; if VFI/VSI port is under the Tag mode, here “By Port” or “By VLan” should be selected then.

viii. Binding LSP

Click “Binding LSP” check box; and then select the bound out LSP and in LSP from the out LSP list and in LSP list.

ix. Select “Enable” and “EMS Out Label” check box, and then input the label value in the “Out Label” input box, this value is same with the local bind label in 5. Establish VFI/VSI.

Note: Not select the check box indicates the binding of PW label and the LSP are cancelled temperarily, so the service will be intterupted.

x. Repeat step iii to step viii to configure LSP for another VFI port.

xi. Click Apply button to save the configurations.

xii. Click Close button to return to the PW window.

xiii. Click Apply button to forward the configurations.

7. Configure the service

In the client operation window, select the NE which is adding/dropping the Ethernet service, and click the menu item Device Config-> SDH Management -> Service Config. In the Service Config dialog box, establish the connection between VCG groups of MSE board and the corresponding paths of optical line board.

Page 134: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

118 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

8. Configure the passed-by optical line board

In the client operation window, select the passed-by NE, click the menu item Device Config-> SDH Management -> Service Config. In the Service Config dialog box, establish the pass-through connection of passed-by optical line board.

Configuring EVPLAN Service EVPLAN is the multi-to-multi Ethernet service. That is, full connection of point-to-point virtual circuit is established among multi points, multi virtual circuits multiple to a label switch LSP, then map into VCG to transfer the Ethernet service and achieve the bandwidth shared.

MSE board supports EVPLAN service.

[Steps]

1. According to the step 1-step 4 in Configuring EPL Service to configure board property, port property and VCG capacity of MSE board.

2. Establish the LSP according to step 2 in Configuring EVPL Service.

3. If VPN under Tag mode is needed, configure VLAN according to the flowchart in Figure 50. For VPN with Tag mode, if not configured with VLAN, the port will not be displayed in LogResource list box.

4. Establish VPN according to the descriptions in Establish VPN, here, the traffic type is Evplan.

5. Establish VFI/VSI (for instance, VPN under Tag mode.)

VFI/VSI of VPN under Raw mode refers to the step 5 in Configuring EVPL Service.

i. In VPN Config window, select a VPN configuration and click VFI/VSI button to go to VSI config window.

ii. Input VSI name and click New VFI/VSI button, then select board

in LogResource list box and click button to add the board to VSI list box.

iii. Repeat step ii to add another MSE board to VSI list box, as shown in Figure 59.

Page 135: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 119

F I G U R E 59 VS I C O N F I G U R AT I O N (EVPLA S E R V I C E ) ( 1 )

iv. In VSI list box, click the selected board, then the corresponding

ports will be displayed in LogResource list box, click button to add the port to VSI list box, as shown in Figure 60.

F I G U R E 60 VS I C O N F I G U R AT I O N (EVPLA S E R V I C E ) ( 2 )

Page 136: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

120 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

v. Repeat step iv to add the port of another MSE board to VSI list box, as shown in Figure 61.

F I G U R E 61 VS I C O N F I G U R AT I O N (EVPLA S E R V I C E ) ( 3 )

Note: The port will not be displayed in the LogResource list box, if,

the port has been employed by other EVPL, EPL or EVPLAN service;

the port has not been configured with VLAN.

vi. Click Apply button to forward VSI configurations.

vii. Click New Emul Port button to enter into New Emul Port dialog box as shown in Figure 62.

Page 137: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 121

F I G U R E 62 NE W EM U L P O R T D I AL O G B O X

viii. In the VFI/VSI list box, select the source board; in the BoardSelect tree, select the destination board and then click Add button to create a Ethernet port for emulation.

For example, in Figure 62, board VSI13 (5,6,7,13) and board VSI23 (5,6,7,14) have the bi-directional service, then the configurations of Ethernet port emulation is described as following:

Firstly, select VSI13 (5,6,7,13) in VFI/VSI list box, then select MSE[1-1-14] (VSI23) in BoardSelect list box. Later, Click Add button to configure the emulation Ethernet port from VSI13 (5,6,7,13) to MSE[1-1-14] (VSI23); likewise, configure the emulation Ethernet port from MSE[1-1-14] (VSI23) to VSI13 (5,6,7,13).

ix. Click OK button to save the configuration and return to VSI Config dialog box.

x. In VSI Config dialog box, select the new emulation Ethernet ports, then LogResource list box displays the available VLAN, as shown in Figure 63.

Page 138: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

122 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 63 VS I C O N F I G U R AT I O N ( AD D VALN F O R E M U L AT I O N E T H E R N E T P O R T ) (1 )

xi. Select VLAN from LogResource list box and click button to add VLAN for the new emulation Ethernet port, as shown in Figure 64.

F I G U R E 64 VS I C O N F I G U R AT I O N ( AD D VALN F O R E M U L AT I O N E T H E R N E T P O R T ) (2 )

xii. Click Apply button to make the configuration valid.

Page 139: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 123

xiii. Click Property button to enter into the Local Bind Label page of VFI/VSI Attribute Config dialog box.

xiv. Modify the Config Mode as Static Config, and then input the local bind label which is from 16 to 4095.

Note: Currently, because the board dose not support the Auto Config mode, so the local bind label should be set manually, moreover, the local bind label is unique for a board.

xv. Go to the broadcast limit page and select the broadcast limit type. If the “Limit” selected, the broadcast speed is limited as 1000 kbit/s, the forward bandwidth of broadcast is 1 M. Other parameters in VFI/VSI Attribute Config dialog box keep the default settings.

xvi. Click Apply button to make the configurations valid.

xvii. Click Close button to close VFI/VSI Attribute Config dialog box and return to VSI Config dialog box.

6. Create PW and LSP according to Configuring EVPL Service.

It is no necessary to set the port type here, the Emulated Port is defaulted. If VFI/VSI port is under the Tag mode, here “By Port” or “By VLan” should be selected then. VLAN ID is needed for the mode of “By VLan”. Besides, different VLAN can bind different LSPs in order to provide different service.

7. Configure the service

In the client operation window, select the NE which is adding/dropping the Ethernet service, and click the menu item Device Config-> SDH Management -> Service Config. In the Service Config dialog box, establish the connection between VCG groups of MSE board and the corresponding paths of optical line board.

8. Configure the passed-by optical line board

In the client operation window, select the passed-by NE, click the menu item Device Config-> SDH Management -> Service Config. In the Service Config dialog box, establish the pass-through connection of passed-by optical line board.

VLAN Configuration Example Suppose both NE K and NE L are ZXMP S320 equipment working at 622 Mbit/s, supporting the VLAN service in the network, as shown in Figure 65. To illustrate the Ethernet service networking mode clearly, other NEs in the networking diagram are not shown.

Page 140: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

124 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 65 ZXMP S320 P O I N T -T O -P O I N T N E T W O R K I N G

User Ethernet L

NE LNE K622 Mbit/s

User Ethernet K

VLAN ID=10 VLAN ID=10

Configure the NE K and NE L for the transmission of 30 M Ethernet traffic between them in the network as the following sections.

Networking Analysis and Board Configuration According to the networking requirements, besides the functional boards, the ZXMP S320 device needs to be configured with the following two service boards:

O4CSD board: for 622 Mbit/s links

SFE4 board: for VLAN service

Determine the board type and quantity based on the service requirements and capacity. Create NE K and NE L, and install boards for them according to corresponding description in Chapter 1.

The board installations of NE K and NE L are shown in Figure 66 and Figure 67 respectively.

Page 141: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 125

F I G U R E 66 CAR D M AN AG E M E N T D I AL O G B O X O F NE K

F I G U R E 67 CAR D M AN AG E M E N T D I AL O G B O X O F NE L

Configuring Card Property Right-click the SFE4 board in the Card Management dialog box, and then select the Property menu item in the pop-up shortcut menu to enter the SFE4 Card Property dialog box. Click the Advanced button in the Card Property dialog box to enter the Advanced dialog box, and configure the card port properties, as shown in Figure 68.

Page 142: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

126 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 68 AD V AN C E D D I A L O G B O X O F SFE4 C AR D

Configuring Data Port Attribute The configuration of NE K is the same as that of NE L, which is described as follows:

1. Configure user port

Port Use State: click User Port1 to enable the port.

VLAN Mode: select Access Mode because the traffic to be accessed by the port does not have VLAN ID.

Duplex Mode: Auto

Speed: Auto

PVID: 10

For other parameters, the default values are adopted.

2. Configure system port

Port Use State: click System Port1 to enable the port.

VLAN Mode: Trunk Mode.

Encapsulation Type: 4Byte 16Bit PPP CRC

Flow Control: it is selected since the traffic is less than 100 M.

For other parameters, the default values are adopted.

Page 143: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 127

Configuring Path Group Click the Path Group Config tab in Figure 68 to enter the Path Group Config page and bind the TU12 channel according to the Ethernet traffic.

In this example, both NE K and NE L should be bound with 15 TU12 channels to implement 30 M Ethernet traffic. The configuration requirements are shown in Table 59.

T AB L E 59 P AT H GR O U P C O N F I G U R AT I O N R E Q U I R E M E N T S

Parameter Configuration

Occupation (TU12 channel) 01 - 15

Concatenation mode Virtual concatenation

Channel group ID 1

After finishing the path group configuration, the Path Group Config page of the SFE4 card is as shown in Figure 69.

F I G U R E 69 PAT H GR O U P C O N F I G P AG E

Configuring Port Capacity Click the Set Port Capacity tab in the Advanced dialog box to enter the Set Port Capacity page. Set channel group 1 of the corresponding NE for the system port 1 of NE K and NE L respectively, as shown in Figure 70.

Page 144: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

128 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 70 SE T P O R T C AP AC I T Y P AG E

Configuring LCAS Click the LCAS Config tab in the Advanced dialog box to enter the LCAS Config page. Set the LCAS for the TU12 of system port 1 for NE K and NE L according to the configuration listed in Table 60.

T AB L E 60 R E Q U I R E M E N T S O F LC AS C O N F I G U R AT I O N

Item Configuration

Port No. System Port1

LCAS Enable Selected

Direction Bi-Dir

Used (TU12 channel) 1 - 15

Taking NE L as example, Figure 71 shows the LCAS configuration of it.

Page 145: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 129

F I G U R E 71 LC AS C O N F I G P AG E O F NE L

Configuring Data Card Property Click the Data Card Property tab in the Advanced dialog box to enter the Data Card Property page. Configure the parameters as follows:

Running Mode: Choose the VLAN Mode

MAC Address: Set the MAC address of NE K to 0x000000000001, and set that of NE L to 0x000000000002.

The configuration of NE K is shown in Figure 72.

Page 146: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

130 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 72 DAT A C AR D P R O P E R T Y P AG E O F NE K

Establishing Connection Establish the optical connection between NE K and NE L according to the connection configuration listed in Table 61 and the description in the section of Connection Establishment of Chapter 1.

T AB L E 61 C O N N E C T I O N C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE K AN D NE L

Source Port Destination Port Connection Type

NE K: O4CSD[1-1-6], Port 1 NE L: O4CSD[1-1-6], Port 1 Bidirectional optical connection

Creating User and VLAN Select an NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu item SNMS -> Customer Management to create a new customer in the pop-up Customer Management dialog box.

The customer name is Customer A, and the customer ID is 1.

Setting VLAN In the client operation window, select NE K and NE L. Click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> Configure Virtual LAN with The Data Card to enter the Data Card VLAN Config dialog box.

1. Create a VLAN

Page 147: SDH Configuration

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 131

In the VLAN Information list box, select Custmer A, and click the Add VLAN button to create a VLAN in the New VLAN dialog box according to the requirements listed in Table 62.

T AB L E 62 VLAN C O N F I G U R AT I O N R E Q U I R E M E N T S

Parameter Configuration

VLAN Name VLAN

VLAN Start ID 10

VLAN End ID 10

2. Add ports to the VLAN

i. In the VLAN Information list box, select VLAN (10).

ii. In Card Ports Information list box, click after selecting User Port1 and System Port1 of SFE4 card for NE K, User Port1 and System Port1 for NE L respectively. Add these ports to the Board Configured list box.

After the configuration, the dialog box is as shown in Figure 73.

F I G U R E 73 DAT A C AR D VLAN C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

Configuring Timeslot In the Data Card VLAN Cnfig dialog box as shown in Figure 73, click the Service button to implement the timeslot configuration of NEs in the Service Config dialog box.

Page 148: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

132 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The timeslot configuration of each NE is as follows, and all configurations are bidirectional.

1. The timeslot configuration of NE K is as shown in Table 63.

T AB L E 63 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE K

Ethernet Card Optical Interface Card

Ethernet card VC12 Optical interface

card AUG TUG3 TUG2 TU12

1 1 - 3

2 1 - 3

3 1 - 3

4 1 - 3

SFE4[1-1-8] 01 - 15 O4CSD[1-1-6] 1 1

5 1 - 3

2. The timeslot configuration of NE L is as shown in Table 64.

T AB L E 64 T I M E S L O T C O N F I G U R AT I O N O F NE L

Ethernet Card Optical Interface Card

Ethernet card VC12 Optical interface

card AUG TUG3 TUG2 TU12

1 1 - 3

2 1 - 3

3 1 - 3

4 1 - 3

SFE4[1-1-8] 01 - 15 O4CSD [1-1-6] 1 1

5 1 - 3

[Result]

When the communication between NEs and the EMS is normal, two verification operations are supported.

1. In the client operation window, select NE K and L, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Data Card Ports Running State. The parameters of the ports of Ethernet card should be same as the setting.

2. The user port 1 of the NE L SFE4 card should receive packets sent from the computer connected with user port 1 of the NE K SFE4 card.

Page 149: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 133

C h a p t e r 4

ATM Service Configuration

This chapter introduces the configuration flow ATM service in the ZXONM E300. In addition, detailed operation steps and methods are described with a networking example of ZXMP S360 NE with the ATM card of AP1S4.

Configuration Flow The SDH network element equipped with ATM card can cooperate with ZXONM E300 to implement the access, exchange, and bandwidth convergence of ATM services.

Table 65 lists ATM cards supported by various SDH equipment.

T AB L E 65 ATM C AR D S

Card Name and compositions

Card ID in EMS

User Port Quantity

System Port Quantity

Applicable Equipment

AP1S8 AP1S 155M×8 155M×4 ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

AP1x8 AP1S 155M×8 155M×4 ZXMP S385

AP1x4+OIS1x4 AP1x4 155M×4 155M×4 ZXMP S330 ZXMP S325

AP1S4 AP1S4 155M×4 155M×3 ZXMP S360

AP1S2 AP1S2 155M×2 155M×2 ZXMP S320

For ZXMP S330 and ZXMP S325, AP1x4 processes the service and OIS1x4 provides the physical interfaces.

Page 150: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

134 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The configuration procedure of ATM service is as follows:

1. Install cards for NE

Double-click the NE icon in the client operation window to open the Card Management dialog box. Install the ATM card, functional cards, and optical line cards for adding/dropping ATM traffic.

2. Configure the ports of ATM card

i. Right-click the ATM card in the Card Management dialog box and select the Property menu item in the shortcut menu to enter the Card Property dialog box.

ii. Click the Advanced button to pop up the Advanced dialog box

iii. In the dialog box, enable the ports for the ATM service; configure Interface, Speed, MaxVPI, MaxVCI and PvccVpiNum which keep the default setting generally. The detailed descriptions are listed in Table 66.

T AB L E 66 ATM AT T R I B U T E S L I S T

Parameters Descriptions Remark

Port No.

Select the needed system port and user port

For ZXMP S380, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S390, ports 1-8 of AP1S are user ports at ATM side, ports 9-12 are system ports at system side.

For ZXMP S330 and ZXMP S325, ports 1-4 of AP1x4 are user ports at ATM side, ports 5-8 are system ports. When the board AP1x4 is seated in slots 1, 2, 15 or 16, only ports 1-6 can be available; when the board AP1x4 is seated in slots 3-6, 11 or 14, only ports 1-8 can be available.

For ZXMP S360, ports 1-4 of AP1S4 are user ports at ATM side, ports 6-8 are system ports at system side. Port 5 is not used at present.

For ZXMP S320, ports 1-2 of AP1S2 are user ports at ATM side, ports 3-4 are system ports at system side.

Interface Include UNI or NNI Keep the setting by default.

Speed Set the port speed The maximum speed is 150000 kbit/s.

MaxVPI Specify the maximum value of VPI

MaxVCI Specify the maximum value of VCI

VPI is from 1 to 255 and VCI is from 1 to 16383 in case of UNI interface; VPI is from 0 to 4095 and VCI is from 1 to 16383 in case of NNI interface.

PvccVpi

Set the maximum VPI for VC connection

The VP beyond the setting can only be configured as Virtual Path Connection (VPC) but not Virtual Channel Connection (VCC). For example, if PvccVpi=4, it indicates the VP whose VPI is from 0 to 3 can be configured as VPC or VCC, the VP whose VPI is over 4 can only be configured as VPC but not VCC.

Page 151: SDH Configuration

Chapter 4 - ATM Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 135

Tip: Generally, the default values are adopted. Therefore, simply enable the port.

3. Establish PVC

Right-click the ATM card in the Card Management dialog box, and select the Pvc Config menu item in the shortcut menu to pop up the configuration dialog box.

Note: It is suggestion that number of uni-directional PVC should be less than 10 k, number of bi-directional PVC should be less than 8 K.

i. Configure flows

In the PVC configuration dialog box, select query mode and click the Flow Config button to configure flows in the Flow Argument Setting dialog box. Input the flow type name, and select the service type and parameters of flows.

Service type

CBR: Constant Bit Rate, for the service with a constant bit rate.

rtVBR: real-time Variable Bit Rate, for the transmission of real-time traffic.

nrtVBR: non-real-time Variable Bit Rate. Similar to rtVBR but the real-time feature is poorer than rtVBR.

UBR: Unspecified Bit Rate. The difference between UBR and VBR is that VBR reserves some bandwidth for adjustment, while UBR finds idle bandwidth by itself. If UBR finds idle bandwidth, it will occupy it. If not, it cannot adjust the bit rate.

ABR: Available Bit Rate

Major parameters

PCR: Peak Cell Rate, with the unit of cell/second.

1 cell/second = 53 × 8 bit/s.

SCR: Sustainable Cell Rate, with the unit of cell/second.

1 cell/second = 53 × 8 bit/s.

MBS: Maximum Burst Size, with the unit of cell.

1 cell = 53 × 8 bit.

Configure PCR, SCR or MBS, or all of them according to the service type.

ii. Configure the terminal point

In the PVC configuration dialog box, click the TTP Config button to enter the TTP Config dialog box. Create TTP and select the PVC type, VPI&VCI, flow type and direction for the terminal point in the TTP Creation dialog box after clicking the New button.

Page 152: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

136 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Note: Only in case of OAM test, should the section point, VP connection end point, OAM end-to-end monitoring, and AIS insertion point in the TTP type area be set.

iii. Configure PVC

In the PVC configuration dialog box, select the Config radio button in the Mode area. And then establish the working PVC or protection PVC between the ports of ATM card according to the requirements of the ATM traffic.

Note: For the connnection of VCI=4, the user type should be OAM. Except that, the other connections should be Normal.

To perform the local switching on the ATM layer, create PVC connections between the ATM ports.

To implement long-haul transmission of ATM traffic through optical paths, create PVC connections between the ATM port and the system port.

To configure revertive protection PVC, according to following descriptions:

Establish a working PVC and a protection PVC, select the protection PVC and click Apply button. Then, Revertive check box can be selected. Select the Revertive check box (A symbol “√” indicates the item is selected), then click Apply button.

4. Configure the timer

In Card Management dialog box, right-click the ATM board and click Timer Set in the shortcut menu to pop up Timer Set dialog box. In the Timer Set dialog box, set the PVC revertive time and the protection delay time, the parameter descriptions are listed in Table 67.

T AB L E 67 P AR AM E T E R D E S C R I P T I O N S I N T I M E R S E T D I AL O G B O X O F ATM B O AR D

Parameters Descriptions Remark

Timer Type Include Keep Timer and Revert Timer

Keep Timer: Once the working VP or VC is failed, if the failure duration is beyond the setting in Keep Timer, the service would be switched to protection VP or VC.

Revert Timer: Once the working VC or VP is reverted to the normal status, if the working duration is up to the setting in Revert Timer, the service would be switched to the working VP or VC.

Prt PVC timer

The time here can be modified, the unit is 100ms.

The default setting of Keep Timer is 500ms, the default setting of Revert Timer is 720000ms (i.e. 720s).

Page 153: SDH Configuration

Chapter 4 - ATM Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 137

Note: Timer configuration is a selectable step. The default setting of Keep Timer is 500 ms and the Revert Timer is 720000 ms (i.e. 720 s).

5. Multiplex ATM traffic to the optical card of the NE

To transmit ATM traffic over a long distance through the SDH network, select the NE to add/drop ATM traffic in the client operation window.

Then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to pop up the Service config dialog box.

In the Service Config dialog box, configure the ATM traffic to the optical card through the system port of the ATM card.

6. Save ATM data

Checkpoint: Before saving ATM data, make sure the NE processing ATM traffic is online and in normal communication with the EMS.

Select the menu item Data Save in the shortcut menu of ATM card to save the ATM configuration data to the FLASH file of the card.

Tip: To implement the PVC connection and saving configuration data, you can also perform the following steps:

Select the NE in the client operation window, and then select Device Config -> ATM Management to pop up the ATM Management dialog box.

In this dialog box, select the menu item Configure -> Pvc Config to configure the PVC connection, Select Board Data Manage -> Data Save to dump the configuration data.

7. Configure optical line cards of the passed-by site

Select the passed-by site icon in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.

In this dialog box, establish the pass-through connection for the optical line card.

Configuration Example Suppose there are two network elements, M and N, between which ATM services should be configured. ZXMP S360 equipment is adopted for NE M and N. The link rate is 2.5 Gbit/s. The type of ATM services between these two NEs is CBR without protection, and the rate is 2 Mbit/s.

Page 154: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

138 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The networking diagram is illustrated in Figure 74, where the passed-by sites are not shown.

F I G U R E 74 NE T W O R K I N G EX AM P L E F O R ATM S E R V I C E

Networking Analysis and Card Configuration Network Analysis ATM cards can perform the access, switching and bandwidth convergence functions for ATM traffic, thus greatly improve the bandwidth utilization.

In this networking example, the ATM card AP1S4 is used to access the ATM service.

The ATM service is converged to the optical card and transmitted over a long distance, as shown in Figure 75.

F I G U R E 75 ATM S E R V I C E R E L AT I O N S H I P

The parameter requirements to access the ATM service are listed in Table 68.

T AB L E 68 ATM S E R V I C E RE Q U I R E M E N T S

Parameter Value

Enabled port Enabled user port: Port 1 Enabled system port: Port 6

Service type Constant Bit Rate (CBR)

Peak Cell Rate (PCR) About 5000 cell/second (1 cell/second = 53 × 8 bit/s)

Connection type VCC

VPI 10

Page 155: SDH Configuration

Chapter 4 - ATM Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 139

Parameter Value

VCI 100

To simplify the operation, the same VPI and VCI are adopted for the port 1 and port 6 of both NEs. In the actual configuration, different VPI and VCI can also be used.

Card Configuration According to the networking requirements above, the following cards should be configured in the NE M and N: OI16 card and LP16 card for STM-16 links, AP1S4 card for the ATM service.

After creating NEs, enter the Card Management dialog box and install cards for them respectively, as shown in Figure 76 and Figure 77.

F I G U R E 76 CAR D M AN AG E M E N T D I AL O G B O X O F NE M

Page 156: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

140 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 77 CAR D M AN AG E M E N T D I AL O G B O X O F NE N

Configuring Port Take NE M as an example. Configure the port of AP1S4 card.

1. Right-click the AP1S4 card in the Card Management dialog box of NE M. Then select the Property menu item in the shortcut menu to pop up the Card Property dialog box.

2. Click the Advanced button to pop up the Advanced dialog box.

3. Select port 1. And then select the Start Use check box.

4. Click the Send button to enable the port 1.

5. Select port 6. And then select the Start Use check box.

6. Click the Send button to enable the port 6.

7. Adopt default values for other parameters.

After the configuration, the dialog box is as shown in Figure 78.

Page 157: SDH Configuration

Chapter 4 - ATM Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 141

F I G U R E 78 CAR D P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O N

The port configuration of AP1S4 card in NE N is same as that of setting of NE M.

Establishing Connection Establish the optical connection between NE M and N based on the connection relation listed in Table 69. Refer to the section of Establishing Connection in Chapter 1 for detailed steps to establish optical connections.

T AB L E 69 C O N N E C T I O N C O N F I G U R AT I O N

Source Port Destination Port Connection Type

NE M: OI16[1-1-5], Port 1 NE N: OI16[1-1-5], Port 1 Bidirectional optical connection

Establishing PVC Connection Take NE M as example. The configuration of NE N is same as that of NE M.

Right-click the AP1S4 card in the Card Management dialog box of NE M, and then select the PVC Config menu item in the shortcut menu, to pop up the PVC configuration dialog box, as shown in Figure 79.

Page 158: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

142 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 79 PVC C O N F I G U R AT I O N D I AL O G B O X

1. Create the flow

Click the Flow Config button in Figure 79 to pop up the Flow Argument Setting dialog box. Create a flow with the parameters as shown in Table 70.

For other parameters not listed in the table, just adopt the default values.

T AB L E 70 FL O W C O N F I G U R AT I O N R E Q U I R E M E N T S

Parameter Configuration

Flow type name Flow 1

Service type CBR

PCR 500 cell/second

2. Configure terminal point

Click the TTP Config button in Figure 79 to pop up the TTP Config dialog box. Set the terminal point in the TTP Config dialog box for the ports 1 and 6 as shown in Table 71.

The configuration of port 1 and port 6 is same. For other parameters not listed in Table 71, adopt the default values directly.

T AB L E 71 TTP C O N F I G U R AT I O N R E Q U I R E M E N T S

Parameter Configuration

PVC type VCC

VPI 10

VCI 100

Flow type Flow 1

Direction Bidirectional

Page 159: SDH Configuration

Chapter 4 - ATM Service Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 143

3. Configure PVC connection

Select the Config radio button in the Mode area in Figure 79. And then establish the PVC connection between port 1 and port 6 of the AP1S4 card, as shown in Figure 80.

F I G U R E 80 PVC C O N N E C T I O N C O N F I G U R AT I O N

4. Multiplex ATM traffic

Select NE M in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to pop up the Service Config dialog box.

Connect the AU4 of AP1S4[1-1-3] Port 6 to the AU4 (1) of OI16[1-1-5] Port 1, as shown in Figure 81.

F I G U R E 81 SE R V I C E C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

Page 160: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

144 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Configuring Passed-by NEs Select the passed-by site icon in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.

Establish the pass-through connection for the AU channel of the passed-by the optical line card.

Page 161: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 145

C h a p t e r 5

Common SDH Management Operations

This chapter describes some common management functions of SDH NEs.

Setting Misconnection Resistance [Purpose] To enable the misconnection resistance function to prevent the path misconnection during protection switching for the MSP ring. [Applicable NEs]

The applicable NEs are ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S200.

[Steps]

1. Make preparations

i. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Device Config -> Common Management -> MS Protection Config menu item to pop up the MS Protection Config dialog box.

ii. In the MS Group List box, select a MS group to enable misconnection resistance, and click Next to enter the APS ID Config dialog box.

iii. Click the Next button to pop up the MS Protection dialog box.

2. Enable the misconnection resistance function

i. Select the Config radio button in the Operation Mode area in the MS Protection dialog box.

ii. Click the More button to pop up the MS Property Config dialog box.

iii. Select the Resist Error Enable check box, as shown in Figure 82.

iv. Click the Apply button to confirm the operation.

Page 162: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

146 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Note: The misconnection resistance function is enabled by default.

F I G U R E 82 MS P R O P E R T Y C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

3. Select the misconnection resistance mode

i. Click the Previous button in the MS Protection dialog box to return to the APS ID Config dialog box.

ii. Click Previous in the APS ID Config dialog box to return to the MS Protection Config dialog box.

iii. Click the Squelch Mode button to pop up the Set Squelch Mode dialog box, as shown in Figure 83.

F I G U R E 83 SE T S Q U E L C H M O D E D I AL O G B O X

iv. Select the condition to enable error resistance from the Squelch Mode drop-down list box for the selected protection group (MSPG).

Page 163: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 147

v. Select the NE in the NE Name list, and click the Send button to issue the error resistance setting to the selected NE.

The Reset button can be clicked to restore the default misconnection resistance settings. With the default settings, the misconnection resistance function will be enabled only when all destinations or all sources are lost.

4. Save the misconnection resistance mode

Enter the MS Protection dialog box again and click the Save Topology button to save the misconnection resistance settings.

5. Repeat step 1 to step 4 to enable, set, and save the misconnection resistance function for the other NEs in the MS protection group.

Note: For each NE in the MS protection group, the misconnection resistance mode must be the same.

6. Calculate the misconnection resistance

i. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the SNMS > Circuit Service Management menu item to pop up the Circuit Service Management dialog box.

ii. Select the APSBusyMgr -> CalMisconn menu item. If the operation is successful, a message box pops up, prompting “calculate misconnection is success”.

7. Send the misconnection resistance service relationship

i. Select the APSBusyMgr -> QueryMisconn menu item in the Circuit Service Management dialog box to pop up the MSPG Filter dialog box.

ii. Select all MSPG and click OK to pop up the Query APS Misconnection dialog box.

iii. Click the Query NE State button to query APS service condition and send the command as well.

[Result]

If the command is sent successfully, misconnection during protection switching for the MSP ring will be prevented.

Setting APS Byte [Purpose]

The Automatic Protection Switching (APS) byte serves for transmitting the MSP switching information. Only when the APS byte is transmitted correctly, can the multiplex section protection switching work normally.

Page 164: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

148 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The value of APS byte can range from 0 to 3, and the default value is 0.

An NE can be included in multiple MSP groups, when it has been configured into a logical subnet.

The ZXONM E300 supports the setting of APS byte in the unit of port, thus guaranteeing normal working of each MSP group.

The principles to set the APS byte are described as follows.

The APS byte of two ports physically connected in the same MS ring must be the same, to guarantee correct transmission of APS byte between two nodes.

If one port belongs to different MSP groups, the APS byte of each MSP group must be unique.

ZXMP S320 and ZXMP S360 do not support the setting of APS byte, and their default APS byte is 0. Therefore, the APS byte must be set to zero for the optical ports connected with the ZXMP S320 or ZXMP S360 equipment.

[Applicable NEs]

The applicable NEs are ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S200.

Take the MSP ring 1 consisting of NE A, B, C, and D in the network presented in Chapter 1 as an example.

[Steps]

1. Configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

Create a MSP group and configure the MS protection relation according to the description in the section of Configuration of Two-fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring in Chapter 1.

2. In the MS Protection dialog box, check the APS byte of the abutting port at the neighbor NE, as shown in Figure 84;

Page 165: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 149

F I G U R E 84 MS P R O T E C T I O N D I AL O G B O X

3. Select the Config radio button in the Operation Mode area;

4. Modify the APS byte of the local port to be same as the value displayed in Neighbor Ne Aps Byte;

5. Click the Apply button to save the APS value;

6. Repeat step 1 to step 7 to set and save the APS byte for the NE B, C, and D in the MSP group respectively.

[Result]

Check if all the NEs can work normally.

Configuring DCC [Purpose]

The data communication channel (DCC) carries the communication data between NEs, including the regenerator section DCC bytes (DCCr) and the multiplex section DCC byte (DCCm).

Table 72 lists the DCC use configuration supported by NEs of different types.

T AB L E 72 DCC U S E C O N F I G U R AT I O N

DCC Configuration Default Configuration Applicable NE and Card

DCCr (Byte: D1 - D3 )

Optical interface card at the rate no greater than STM-16 All SDH NEs

DCCr + DCCm (Byte: D1 - D12)

Optical interface card at the rate of STM-64

Optical cards of ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, and ZXMP S385; and optical cards and

Page 166: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

150 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

DCC Configuration Default Configuration Applicable NE and Card

ET1 card of ZXMP S200.

2 M tributary Do not support. ET1 board of ZXMP S200

Through configuring the DCC use and changing the DCC byte of the port, the following functions can be provided:

The communication rate of NEs will be improved with the DCC configuration of DCCr + DCCm.

As long as the DCC byte of the abutting optical interfaces keeps the same, any line port can use DCCr or DCCm to carry the communication data separately.

When the DCC is not used for optical interfaces, non-communication data can be transmitted through the pass-through connection between DCCr and DCCm among different ports with the overhead cross-connect function of the EMS.

The DCC byte can be configured separately and differently in the receiving direction and the transmitting direction.

Caution:

The DCC must be configured as DCCr for the optical card used for regeneration.

If the DCC is used to transmit communication data, the DCC setting must be the same for the abutting optical interfaces to guarantee the communication data transmission.

[Applicable NEs]

The applicable NEs areZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S200.

[Steps]

1. Select an applicable NE in the topology.

2. Select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> DCC Use Set to enter the DCC Use Set dialog box.

Tip: You can also enter the DCC Use Set dialog box in the following way:

Double-click an applicable NE in the topology to pop up the Card Management dialog box. And then right-click an optical card to be modified, and select the DCC Use Set menu item in the shortcut menu to pop up the DCC Use Set dialog box.

Page 167: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 151

3. In the Resource list box of the dialog box, select a card. Then click

the button and change it to the button. The right side of the dialog box will display all the ports and DCC configuration information of the card.

4. Select the DCC use byte of the local port in the dialog box according to the DCC use of the abutting optical interface, as shown in Figure 85.

F I G U R E 85 DCC U S E S E T D I AL O G B O X

The Advanced check box is valid only for ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S200 and ZXMP S325 equipment. With Advance check box selected, the DCC byte in the receiving and sending direction of the optical interface can be set separately, including DCCr, DCCm, DCCr + DCCm, and Not use DCC.

With General check box selected, the DCC byte in the receiving direction and sending direction of the optical interface will be set at the same time, including Use extended DCC and Not use extend DCC.

For ET1 board for ZXMP S200, set whether the 2 M tributary port 5-port 8 support ECC mode or not. The ECC mode includes Not Supported, Optical ECC and Electrical ECC, among which, the electrical ECC means transferring the ECC information by 2 M cable directly, the optical ECC means transferring the ECC information by multiplexing the 2 M tributary signal with ECC information into the timeslot of optical line board (i.e. sending the ECC information by optical line board).

5. Click the Apply button to save the DCC configuration.

Note:

For the board to be used as REG board, the ECC mode must be DCCr.

If the data is transferred by DCC path, the DCC of docking ports must be set in same mode in order to gurantee the smoothly communication.

Page 168: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

152 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

[Result]

After setting the DCC use, check if the EMS message can be transferred normally when transmitting communication data via DCC.

Configuring Static Route [Purpose]

The static route between the managed equipment and the EMS should be established when the EMS manages the equipment through the Data Communications Network (DCN).

For example:

In Figure 86, IP addresses of NE5-NE8 are in 192.193.16.0 (subnet mask is 255.255.255.0), IP addresses of NE9-NE12 are in 192.193.10.0 (subnet mask is 255.255.255.0).

To enable ZXONM E300 to manage NE5 to NE12, the static route must be configured between NE5 and NE9.

F I G U R E 86 DCN N E T W O R K I N G E X AM P L E

DCN

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4NE5

NE6

NE7

NE8

NE12

NE9

NE10

NE11

EMS(10.168.20.100)

Router1Hub

Router2(192.193.16.33)

Router3(192.193.10.55)

Table 73 lists the route information of NE5 and NE9.

T AB L E 73 S T AT I C R O U T E I N F O R M AT I O N

NEIP Address

NE5 NE9

Destination IP address Equals to the EMS IP address: 10.168.20.100

Equals to the EMS IP address: 10.168.20.100

Destination mask address Equals to the EMS mask address: 255.255.255.0

Equals to the EMS mask address: 255.255.255.0

Page 169: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 153

NEIP Address

NE5 NE9

Gateway IP address Equals to the IP address of Router 2: 192.193.16.33

Equals to the IP address of Router 3: 192.193.10.55

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take Figure 86 as an example.

[Steps]

1. Select NE 5 and NE 9 in the client operation window, and select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Static Route Config to enter the NE Static Route Config dialog box.

2. Suppose NE5 has been selected. Click the Add button to add a piece of route information in the dialog box.

3. Fill in the route information of NE5 according to the configuration shown in Table 73.

4. Click the Apply button to save and send the command, as shown in Figure 87.

F I G U R E 87 NE S T AT I C R O U T E C O N F I G U R AT I O N D I AL O G B O X (NE5)

5. Select NE 9 in the Resource list box. Then click the button and

change it to the button. The right side of the dialog box will show that the currently selected NE is NE9.

6. Repeat step 2 to step 4 to fill out route information of NE9 according to Table 73. The NE Static Route Config dialog box of NE 9 is as shown in Figure 88.

Page 170: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

154 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 88 NE S T AT I C R O U T E C O N F I G U R AT I O N D I AL O G B O X (NE9)

[Result]

Check if the EMS can manage NE5 to NE12 normally.

Configuring Gateway NE [Purpose]

EMS can communicate with the managed NEs by gateway NE when the transmission equipment is managed by Data Communication Network (DCN).

Gateway NE, which is connected with EMS or DCN, forwards the information among other NEs and EMS. Master and slave gateway NEs can be set by EMS in order to avoid communication interruption once the master gateway NE was abnormally.

Gateway NE can isolate the IP address of transmission equipment and the address of DCC network in order to save the resource of user’s IP address and router.

For example:

In Figure 89, the transmission network is composed of NE1-NE12 which are connected to EMS via DCN network. NE6 and NE9 are connected to DCN directly.

Page 171: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 155

F I G U R E 89 DCN N E T W O R K (1 )

DCN

NE1

NE2

NE3 NE4

NE5

NE6

NE7 NE8

NE12

NE9

NE10

NE11

10.168.35.1010.168.36.11

DCN网关10.168.36.1DCN网关10.168.35.1

10.168.35.9 10.168.36.9

Suppose DCN has two network segments which are 10.168.35.0 (mask is 255.255.255.0) and 10.168.36.0 (mask is 255.255.255.0). The IP addresses of EMS are 10.168.35.10 and 10.168.36.11, and the IP addresses of NE6 and NE9 are 10.168.35.9 and 10.168.36.9 separately. The IP addresses of other NEs are 192.*.*.*.

In order to enable the EMS managing all of the NEs, NE6 and NE9 should be configured as gateway NEs; meanwhile, NE6 or NE9 can also be set as the gateway NE for each other to enhance the reliability of communication.

[Applicable NEs]

The NEs, which can be set as gateway NEs, are ZXMP S385, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325 and ZXMP S200.

take Figure 89 as an example.

[Steps]

1. Configure NE6 and NE9 as gateway NE

i. In EMS client operation window, select NE6 and NE9 and click the menu item Device Config -> Set The NE as Gateway to pop up Set GNE dialog box.

ii. Select NE6 and NE9 from Select Resource list box, and then click

button to add the NE6 and NE9 to GNE list box.

iii. Click Communication Addr button to pop up Set GNE IP dialog box. The parameter descriptions are listed in Table 74.

Page 172: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

156 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 74 P AR AM E T E R D E S C R I P T I O N S O F S E T T I N G G AT E W AY NE

Parameters NE6 NE9

Host IP Address 10.168.35.10 10.168.36.11

If Use Yes No

Host IP Address means the IP address of EMS computer. For master and slave NEs, Host IP Address should be different.

iv. Click Apply button to save and forward command.

2. Configure static router for NE6 and NE9

In EMS client operation window, select NE6 and NE9 and click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> NE Static Router Config to pop up NE Static Router Config dialog box. Set the static router according to Table 75, the steps to configure the static router according to Configuring Static Route.

T AB L E 75 P AR AM E T E R D E S C R I P T I O N S O F C O N F I G U R I N G S T AT I C R O U T E R F O R NE6 AN D NE9

Parameters NE6 NE9

DestIPAddr DCN network segment (10.168.35.0)

DCN network segment (10.168.36.0)

DestMaskAddr DCN subnetwork mask (255.255.255.0)

DCN subnetwork mask (255.255.255.0)

GatewayIPAddr DCN gateway (10.168.35.1) DCN gateway (10.168.36.1)

If Start Yes No

3. Configure NE6 or NE9 as the gateway NE for each other

i. In the EMS client operation window, select NE6 and NE9 and click the menu item Device Config -> Set Master Slave GNE to pop up Set Master/Slave GNE dialog box.

ii. In the Set Master/Slave GNE dialog box, set NE6 as the master gateway NE for NE9 and set NE9 as the master gateway NE for NE6.

iii. Click Apply button to make the configurations valid.

4. Repeat step 3 to set NE6 as the gateway NE of NE1, NE2, NE3, NE4, NE5 and NE7, then, set NE9 as the slave gateway NE of these NEs.

5. Repeat step3 to set NE9 as the gateway NE for NE8, NE10, NE11 and NE12, then set NE6 as the slave gateway NE for these NEs.

[Result]

Take Figure 89 as an example, EMS can manage NE1-NE12 normally.

Page 173: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 157

Setting Managing Capacity Expansion [Purpose]

The capacity of network can be expanded through adding network element nodes to the original optical network and sending the configuration data to related NEs.

The expansion management is applicable to the following three cases:

Add nodes to an SDH network without MS protection

Add nodes to a MS protection ring

Add nodes to a MS protection chain

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

To add a node into an SDH network without MS protection

Suppose both NE 1 and NE 2 are ZXMP S380 equipment and the aggregate rate is 2.5 Gbit/s. The new node to be added is NE3 which is ZXMP S380.

Figure 90 illustrates the network before and after the capacity expansion.

F I G U R E 90 NE T W O R K I N G D I AG R AM O F C AP AC I T Y E X P A N S I O N WI T H O U T M U L T I P L E X S E C T I O N P R O T E C T I O N

1. Double-click the NE3 icon in the client operation window to enter the Card Management dialog box.

2. Considering the aggregate rate of the network and the optical connection demand after expansion, install OL16 cards into slot 3 and slot 6 of NE3 as well as necessary functional cards and service cards.

3. Select NE1, NE2, and NE3 in the client operation window, and then select SNMS -> Expand to enter the Expand dialog box.

4. Select the Expand -> Expand Guide menu item to enter the Expand-Select Link & New NE dialog box.

Page 174: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

158 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

5. Select NE1 in the SrcNE drop-down list box, and NE2 in the DestNE box. Then optical connection information between the two NEs will be listed in the dialog box.

6. Select NE3 in the NewNE drop-down list box.

7. Click the optical connection between the 3#OL16 card of NE1 and the 3#OL16 card of NE2 in the dialog box. Then click the Next button to enter the Expand-Modify Link dialog box.

8. Configure the optical cards of NE3 that connect with NE1 and NE2 according to the optical connection relationship listed in Table 76.

T AB L E 76 C O N N E C T I O N R E L AT I O N S H I P S

Source NE Destination NE

NE 3: OL16[1-1-3], Port 1 NE 1: OL16[1-1-3], Port 1

NE 3: OL16[1-1-6], Port 1 NE 2: OL16[1-1-3], Port 1

9. Click the Next button in the Expand-Modify Link dialog box to enter the Expand-Confirm NE Info dialog box, and save the expansion configuration in the EMS database, as shown in Figure 91.

F I G U R E 91 SAV E E X P AN S I O N C O N F I G U R AT I O N I N EMS D AT AB AS E

10. Click OK to enter the Expand-Send NE Info dialog box to send the NE modification information, and then select the sending mode from the Ts. Mode drop-down list box.

Note: The SendPart mode is recommended to avoid service interruption during sending timeslots.

Page 175: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 159

11. Click the Send button. If NEs can communicate with the EMS normally, the configuration will be sent to the NEs.

To add a node into a MS protection ring

Suppose NE4, NE5 and NE6 forms a four-fiber MS protection group with the ID 6. They are all ZXMP S390 equipment. And the APS IDs of NE4, NE5 and NE6 are 0, 1 and 2 respectively. The new node to be added is NE7, and it is ZXMP S390 equipment too.

Figure 92 shows the network before and after the expansion.

F I G U R E 92 EX P AN S I O N O F MS P R O T E C T I O N R I N G N E T W O R K

1. Double click the NE7 icon in the client operation window to enter the Card Management dialog box.

2. Considering the rate of the network and the optical connection demand after expansion, install OL64 cards into slot 3, 6, 12 and 16 of NE7 in addition to necessary functional cards and service cards.

3. Select NE4, NE5, NE6 and NE7 in the client operation window, and select the SNMS -> Expand menu item to enter the Expand dialog box.

4. Select the Expand -> Expand Guide menu item in the Expand dialog box to enter the Expand-Select Link & New NE dialog box.

5. Select NE6 in SrcNE and NE4 in DestNE. The dialog box lists the optical connection information between these two NEs.

6. Select NE7 in NewNE.

7. Click an optical connection in the dialog box, then click Next to enter the Expand-Modify Link dialog box, and change the optical connection card of NE7 according to the optical connection relationship listed in Table 77.

T AB L E 77 C O N N E C T I O N C O N F I G U R AT I O N (NE7)

Source Destination

NE6: OL64[1-1-3], Port 1 NE7: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1

NE6: OL64[1-1-12], Port 1 NE7: OL64[1-1-15], Port 1

NE7: OL64[1-1-3], Port 1 NE4: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1

NE7: OL64[1-1-12, Port 1 NE4: OL64[1-1-15], Port 1

Page 176: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

160 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

8. Click Next in the Expand-Modify Link dialog box to enter the MS Ring page of the Expand-Modify MS Group dialog box, and select 3 in APS ID.

9. Click Next to enter the Expand-Confirm NE Info dialog box, and save the expansion configuration in the EMS database, as shown in Figure 93.

F I G U R E 93 SAV E E X P AN S I O N C O N F I G U R AT I O N I N EMS D AT AB AS E

10. Click OK to enter the Expand-Send NE Info dialog box to send the NE modification information, and then select the sending mode from the Ts. Mode drop-down list box of NE7.

Note: The SendPart mode is recommended to avoid service interruption during sending timeslots.

11. Click Send to send the information to NE7 while it is in normal communication with the EMS.

To add a node to a MS protection chain

Suppose both NE10 and NE11 are ZXMP S330 equipment and the link rate is 2.5 Gbit/s. They form a 1+1 MS protection chain named 1+1MSLink, with the ID 3.

The new node to be added is NE12, and the NE type is ZXMP S330.

Figure 94 shows the network before and after the expansion.

Page 177: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 161

F I G U R E 94 EX P AN S I O N O F MS P R O T E C T I O N L I N K N E T W O R K

NE10 NE11

5# 5#

6# 6#

1+1 MS Link (2.5 Gbit/s)

NE10 NE12

5# 5#

6# 6#

Before expansion

NE11

11# 5#

12# 6#

After expansion

1+1 MS Link (2.5 Gbit/s) 1+1 MS Link-n (2.5 Gbit/s)

1. Double click the NE12 icon in the client operation window to enter the Card Management dialog box.

2. Considering the rate of the network and the optical connection demand after expansion, install OL64 cards into slot 5, 6, 11 and 12 of NE12 in addition to necessary functional cards and service cards.

3. Select NE10,NE11 and NE12 in the client operation window, and select the menu item SNMS -> Expand to enter the Expand dialog box.

4. Select the Expand -> Expand Guide menu item in the Expand dialog box to enter the Expand-Select Link & New NE dialog box.

5. Select NE10 in SrcNE and NE11 in DestNE. The dialog box lists the optical connection information between these two NEs.

6. Select NE12 in NewNE.

7. Click an optical connection in the dialog box, then click Next to enter the Expand-Modify Link dialog box, and change the optical connection card of NE12 according to the optical connection relationship listed in Table 78.

T AB L E 78 C O N N E C T I O N C O N F I G U R AT I O N (NE12)

Source Destination

NE10: OL16[1-1-5], Port 1 NE12: OL16[1-1-5], Port 1

NE10: OL16[1-1-6], Port 1 NE12: OL16[1-1-6], Port 1

NE12: OL16[1-1-11], Port 1 NE11: OL16[1-1-5], Port 1

NE12: OL16[1-1-12], Port 1 NE11: OL16[1-1-6], Port 1

8. Click Next in the Expand-Modify Link dialog box to enter the MS Chain page of the Expand-Modify MS Group dialog box.

ZXONM E300 automatically classifies NE10 and NE12 into the original protection group, and NE12 and NE11 into a new protection group (with the group ID as 5 by default), as shown in Figure 95.

Page 178: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

162 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 95 MS C H AI N P AG E O F E X P AN D -M O D I F Y MS GR O U P D I AL O G B O X

9. Modify the name of the protection group formed by NE12 and NE11 as “1+1MSLink-n”, and click Next to enter the Expand-Confirm NE Info dialog box and save the expansion configuration, as shown in Figure 96.

F I G U R E 96 SAV E E X P AN S I O N C O N F I G U R AT I O N T O EMS D AT AB AS E

10. Click OK to enter the Expand-Send NE Info dialog box to send the NE modification information, then select the sending mode from the Ts. Mode drop-down list box.

Note: The SendPart mode is recommended to avoid service interruption during sending timeslots.

11. Click Send to send the information to NE12 while it is in normal communication with the EMS.

[Result]

The NE topology structure meets the expansion requirements in the client operation window.

If the expansion data have been sent to the NE successfully, the original traffic will be transmitted normally after the expansion.

Page 179: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 163

Setting Circuit Auto Search [Purpose]

Circuit auto search function can automatically search the timeslots that have not been used by circuit, and then use them to create circuit.

By creating circuit, the management of timeslots turns into the management of end-to-end service. For example, user can add description information to circuit, and query bandwidth of data service circuit in the data view of EMS.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Step]

1. In the client operation window, click the SNMS -> Circuit Service Management menu item to enter the Circuit Service Management dialog box.

2. In the Circuit Service Management dialog box, click the Circuit Management -> Circuit Auto Search menu item to pop up the NE Filter dialog box.

3. Select the NE that needs auto search of circuit, and click the OK button.

[Result]

The EMS client operation window will pop up a prompt box, indicating the number of circuits found.

Setting Circuit Query [Purpose]

Query the circuit configuration information of the NE, including the basic circuit information, topology structure, relation between the client layer circuit and the service layer circuit, and the circuit-related alarms and performances.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example.

[Steps]

1. Select the menu item SNMS -> Circuit Service Management in the client operation window to enter the Circuit Service Management dialog box.

Page 180: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

164 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

2. Select the menu item Circuit Management -> Query to enter the Filter dialog box.

3. Set Port A as E and Port Z as B. For other items, just adopt the default values.

4. Click OK to enter the Circuit Query dialog box.

If the command is sent successfully, the Circuit Query dialog box will display the service configuration information between NE E and NE B, as shown in Figure 97.

F I G U R E 97 C I R C U I T QU E R Y D I AL O G B O X

Select a circuit from the list box, and the Property, Port, Channel, SNC or SNCP page will show the detailed information of this circuit respectively.

Select a circuit from the list box, and click to query the topology structure of the circuit.

If the selected circuit is a service layer circuit, select the Circuit -> Client Layer Circuit menu item to query the information of the client layer circuit included at the service layer.

Select a circuit from the list box, and select the Alarm -> Query Circuit CurAlarm or Alarm -> Circuit HisAlarm menu item to query the current alarm or history alarm related to this circuit.

Select a circuit from the list box, and select the Performance -> Circuit CurPerf or Performance -> Circuit HisPerf menu item to query the current performance or history performance related to this circuit.

Page 181: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 165

Setting Broadcast Circuit Query [Purpose]

The configuration information of a broadcast circuit includes the basic circuit information, topology structure, relationship between the client layer circuit and the service layer circuit, and the circuit-related alarm and performance.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select the menu item SNMS -> Circuit Service Management in the client operation window to enter the Circuit Service Management dialog box.

2. Select the Circuit Management -> Query BC Circuit Grp menu item to enter the Query BC Circuit Grp dialog box.

3. Click the NE drop-down list box and select the start NE of the broadcast circuit.

4. Select the service speed of the broadcast circuit in the Speed area.

5. Click the Refresh button.

If the command is sent successfully, the Query BC Circuit Grp dialog box will display the circuit information meeting the query conditions, as shown in Figure 98.

F I G U R E 98 QU E R Y BC C I R C U I T GR P D I AL O G B O X

Select a circuit from the list box and the information of this circuit group will be showed in the Description area.

Select a circuit from the list box, and click Query BC Circuit to enter the Circuit Query dialog box as shown in Figure 97, including the basic circuit information, topology, relationship between the client layer circuit and the service layer circuit, and the alarms and performances.

Page 182: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

166 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Setting NE Auto Search [Purpose]

The auto search of NE function can search the NEs that are running and have not been managed by the current manager, and then upload the NEs’ data, so as to enable the EMS to manage these NEs.

Two kinds of search methods are available:

Search All: specify the start IP address of NE. The EMS shall search the NE with the start IP address first, and then search all the NEs with IP addresses greater than the start IP address and their corresponding optical links.

Search from Ne: specify the NEs manageable by the EMS. The EMS shall search all the NEs and optical links, or optical links only, which connect with the specified NEs.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S385, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325

[Steps]

To specify the start IP address and search SDH NE and corresponding optical links:

1. In the client operation window, click the Device Config -> Search SDH Ne and Link menu item to pop up the Search SDH Ne and Link dialog box, as shown in Figure 99.

Page 183: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 167

F I G U R E 99 SE AR C H SDH NE AN D L I N K D I AL O G B O X (S E AR C H AL L )

2. Choose the acknowledgement mode in the Ack drop-down list box to be Manual Ack or Auto Ack.

3. The default search method is to specify the start IP address of NE and search all the NEs and optical links. Therefore, input the start IP address of NE in the Start IP text box.

4. Click the Begin Search button to enter the Ack Searched Ne dialog box which displays the information of NEs found and the error information, as shown in Figure 100.

Page 184: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

168 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 100 AC K S E AR C H E D N E D I AL O G B O X

5. If the Manual Ack is adopted, choose the NE that needs data upload in the New Ne list box, and click the Ack button to enter the Upload Detailed Info dialog box. If the Auto Ack is adopted, the Upload Detailed Info dialog box will appear automatically.

6. If the Manual Ack is adopted, click the Next button to enter the Ack Searched Link dialog box. If the Auto Ack is adopted, the Ack Searched Link dialog box will appear automatically.

7. If the Manual Ack is adopted, select the normal link that needs acknowledgement and then click the Ack button. If the Auto Ack is adopted, the system will automatically acknowledge all the normal links.

To specify an NE and search this NE and its corresponding optical links:

1. In the client operation window, click the Device Config -> Search SDH Ne and Link menu item to pop up the Search SDH Ne and Link dialog box, as shown in Figure 99.

2. Choose the acknowledgement mode in the Ack drop-down list box to be Manual Ack or Auto Ack.

3. Click the radio button of Search From Ne and make it to be . The Search Content drop-down list box and the Search From Ne searching box will be activated.

4. Choose the NEs to be searched in the Search From Ne searching box. The selected NE will be checked with “√”, as shown in Figure 101.

Page 185: SDH Configuration

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 169

F I G U R E 101 S E AR C H SDH N E AN D L I N K D I AL O G B O X (S E AR C H FR O M N E )

5. Click the Search Content dialog box to choose the search content. The options are: SDH Ne and Link, Only Link.

6. Click the Begin Search button. Perform the subsequent operations according to step 4 through step 7 described in the task of “To specify the start IP address, and search all the NEs and optical links”.

[Result]

If NEs and links satisfying the query condition are found, these NEs and links will be updated and displayed in the EMS topology.

If nothing is found, the system will prompt error message.

Setting Card Auto Search [Purpose]

If a card has been installed in a NE, but the EMS has no data related to the card. The card auto search function can automatically install the card in the EMS and upload the card data.

This function is generally employed in commissioning.

[Prerequisite]

The NE is online and can communicate with EMS normally.

Page 186: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

170 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Neither the NCP database of NE nor the EMS database has data related to the card.

The card has been powered on and is waiting for configuration.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S385, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, double-click the NE to be installed with the card to enter the Card Management dialog box.

2. In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the slot of the card to pop up the shortcut menu.

3. Click the Board Auto Find menu item.

[Result]

If the command succeeded, the slot will be installed with corresponding card in the EMS, and the card data is identical with that of the corresponding card in the equipment hardware.

If the command failed, the EMS will pop up a prompt box, indicating the failure reason.

Page 187: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 171

PART B

Operations during Running

In this part, operations concerning fault management are provided for users to check the running status of equipment, discover and solve possible faults.

PART B includes the following three chapters:

Chapter 6 Alarm Management

This chapter describes the operations of alarm setting and alarm query.

Chapter 7 Performance Management

This chapter describes the operations of performance setting and performance query.

Chapter 8 Maintenance Management

This chapter introduces the basic maintenance operations.

Page 188: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

172 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 189: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 173

C h a p t e r 6

Alarm Management

This chapter describes the operation methods and flows of alarm configuration and alarm query in ZXONM E300.

Alarm Configuration To locate alarms quickly or avoid interference caused by worthless alarms, the location and parameters of alarms can be set during routine maintenance, such as masking some alarms, or setting standby alarms.

Setting Alarm Mask [Purpose]

Alarm mask is used to confirm whether to report the alarm to the EMS. The NE will not report a masked alarm to the EMS.

Caution: The normal supervison on the network running status will be affected because the card of NE will not report a masked alarm to the EMS.

Therefore, try to avoid the alarm mask operation during the network running, or cancel the operation in time after maintenance.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take NE D in the networking example in Chapter 1 as an example.

[Steps]

To mask the input optical power out-of-limit alarm of NE D OL16[1-1-1] card Port 1

Page 190: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

174 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and select the menu item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Mask menu to enter the Alarm Mask dialog box.

2. Select “OL16 [1-1-1]” in the Detection Card drop-down list box.

3. Select “STM16 optical physical interface” in the Detection Point drop-down list box.

4. Select “1#Port” under “OL16[1-1-1]” in the Source Card list.

5. Select “input optical power out of limit” in the Alarm Reason drop-down list box.

6. Click the Add button to add this alarm to Alarm Mask List.

7. Click the Apply button to mask the alarm.

F I G U R E 102 AL AR M M AS K D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

When the optical power out-of-limit alarm is generated on Port 1 of NE D OL16[1-1-1] card, it will not be reported to the EMS.

Double click NE D in the client operation window, and the alarm mask status indicator will be displayed on the OL16[1-1-1] card in the Card Management dialog box.

Page 191: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 175

Setting Alarm Severity [Purpose]

The alarms in ZXONM E300 are divided into different levels depending on the severity, including critical alarm, major alarm, minor alarm, and warning alarm. Each alarm has a default severity level in the system.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example.

Modify the severity of STM-16 optical interface LOS alarm from the default level (critical alarm) to major alarm level:

[Steps]

1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and select the Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Severity menu to enter the Alarm Severity dialog box.

2. Click the icon before “STM-16 optical physical interface” to unfold the alarms under this interface, as shown in Figure 103.

3. Click the Alarm Severity drop-down list box corresponding to LOS under “STM-16 optical physical interface”, and modify it as “Major”.

4. Click the Apply button to confirm the modification.

F I G U R E 103 AL AR M S E V E R I T Y D I AL O G B O X

Page 192: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

176 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

[Result]

When the STM-16 optical interface of NE D generates an LOS alarm, its alarm level will be “Major”.

Setting Alarm Standby [Purpose]

The alarm standby function is used to process the alarms generated on the ports on which no traffic have been loaded in the network.

The SDH NE supports two alarm standby modes: auto report and inversion.

Auto report: The alarm will not be reported to the ZXONM E300 until the port is loaded with traffic, and then the normal alarm reporting status is recovered automatically.

Inversion: The alarm status of the alarm source is inverse of the actual alarm status. For example, if the port of electrical tributary board is set as “Inversion” mode, then, R_LOS alarm will be happened after the board carrying service.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take NE E in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. Suppose no traffic have been loaded on the port 1 of ET1[1-1-2] card of NE E.

[Steps]

1. Select NE E in the client operation window, and select the Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Standby menu item to enter the Alarm Standby dialog box.

2. Select “ET1[1-1-2]” in the Detection Card drop-down list box.

3. Select “PDH 2M physical interface” in the Detection Point drop-down list box, as shown in Figure 104

4. Select “1#Port” under “ET1[1-1-2]” in the Source Card List.

5. Select “Inversion” in the Alarm Standby Mode drop-down list box.

6. Click the Add button to add this alarm to Alarm Standby List.

7. Click the Apply button to confirm the configuration.

Page 193: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 177

F I G U R E 104 AL AR M S T AN D B Y D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

Disconnect the cable between ET1 card Port 2 and Port 1 of NE E while the traffic has been loaded. Then query the current alarm of NE E, you will find the EMS does not report the LOS alarm of the port.

Connect the cable between ET1 card Port 2 and Port 1 of NE E. Query the current alarm of NE E while the traffic recovers. Then you will find the EMS report the LOS alarm of the port.

Setting Alarm Audible [Purpose]

Set sound of the SDH equipment if the alarm is happened.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Audible to enter the Alarm Audible Set dialog box.

2. Click the Audible drop-down button and select if the alarm sound is audible for the SDH equipment, as shown in Figure 105. The options are: Allow, Forbid, Reset.

3. Click the Apply button to confirm the operation.

Page 194: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

178 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 105 AL AR M AU D I B L E S E T D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

If Allow is selected, when the power cable is correctly connected, the equipment will give alarm sound when there is an alarm in the equipment.

If Forbid is selected, the equipment will not give alarm sound

If Reset is selected, the equipment will stop the current alarm sound, and will not give alarm sound until a new alarm occurs.

Setting Alarm Audio [Purpose]

Users can select a preferred sound file provided by ZXONM E300 or a customized sound file as the alarm prompt sound.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select the menu item System -> System Config to enter the System Management dialog box.

2. Go to Alarm page and click the Sound Category drop-down list box in Alarm Audio combo box, then select the alarm level or alarm prompt.

3. Click the Sound drop-down list box, and select a sound file.

4. Input or adjust the sound duration in the Duration input box.

5. Click the Apply button to apply the configuration.

Page 195: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 179

[Result]

The sounds of each alarm level and the alarm prompt at the EMS terminal are consistent with the sound files configured.

Setting Alarm Color [Purpose]

To set the color of alarms at different levels as required.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select the System -> System Config menu item to enter the System Management dialog box.

2. Go to Alarm page and click an alarm level button in the Alarm Color combo box to enter Alarm Color Chooser dialog box corresponding to the alarm level. Then modify the alarm color of this alarm level.

3. Click the OK button in the Alarm Color Chooser dialog box. And then click the Apply button in the System Management dialog box to confirm the modification.

[Result]

The alarms of different levels will be shown in the color configured at the EMS terminal.

Setting Alarm Prompt [Purpose]

The EMS will prompt the user about the alarm when the prompt function of this alarm is enabled.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take NE E in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. Suppose it is necessary to prompt the “Loss Of STM-1 Optical Signal” (LOS) alarm for NE E.

[Steps]

1. Select NE E in the client operation window, and select the menu item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Prompt to enter the Alarm prompt setting dialog box.

2. Select LOS in the Candidate Alarm list under STM1 branch, and click

to add the selected alarm to the Need Prompt Alarm list.

Page 196: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

180 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

3. Click Apply to confirm the configuration, as shown in Figure 106.

F I G U R E 106 AL AR M P R O M P T S E T T I N G D I AL O G B O X

Note: Click Apply button to make this alarm prompt be applicable to other NEs, which can set the alarm prompt on NEs fastly.

[Result]

When NE E reports the LOS alarm, the EMS will automatically prompt the user with a prompt dialog box of this alarm.

Setting Alarm Filter [Purpose]

The alarms can be reported optionally based on the user’s requirements through setting the alarm filter. It includes the settings of AlarmReport Filter and AlarmShow Filter.

AlarmReport Filter: This setting is sent to the EMS server layer (Manager). For the alarms set in the AlarmReport Filter mode, the card will detect them and report them to the server, but none users logging to this server can detect them.

AlarmShow Filter: For the alarms set in the AlarmShow Filter mode, the card will detect them and report them to the manager, but the alarms are displayed or not in the client operation window depending on different users.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take the NE E in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as example. Suppose it is necessary to filter the NCP card alarm for NE E.

Page 197: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 181

[Steps]

To set AlarmReport Filter:

1. Select NE E in the client operation window, and select the menu item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Filter to enter the Alarm filter setting dialog box.

2. In the AlarmReport Filter page of the dialog box, select “NCP[1-1-9]”

under “E” in the Optional condition list, and click to add it to the filter condition list.

3. Click Apply to confirm the configuration, as shown in Figure 107.

F I G U R E 107 AL AR M F I L T E R S E T T I N G D I AL O G B O X ( AL AR M R E P O R T F I L T E R P AG E )

To set AlarmShow Filter:

1. Select NE E in the client operation window, and select the Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Filter menu item.

2. Click the AlarmShow Filter tab in the dialog box to enter the AlarmShow Filter page.

3. Select “NCP[1-1-9]” under “E” in the Optional condition list, and click

to add the NCP card to the filter condition list.

4. Click Apply to confirm the configuration.

[Result]

With the AlarmReport Filter set, no users logging in this server will detect the NCP card alarm of NE E.

Page 198: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

182 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

With the AlarmShow Filter set, and the current login user will not detect the NCP card alarm of NE E in the client operation window, but the alarm can be detected through the alarm query function.

Setting Agent External Alarm [Purpose]

The quantity of external alarms varies with equipment. Each monitoring input can be connected with different external alarm detectors, and can report alarms from each detector. The alarm definition and electrical level can be set in the EMS.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S320, ZXMP S360, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S200.

The following example uses the smoke alarm to describe how to change the setting of Agent external alarm.

The smoke alarm is set as a low electrical level alarm by default in the system.

[Steps]

1. Select SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Agent External Alarm to enter the Agent External Alarm Setting dialog box.

2. Click the drop-down button of the Alarm Mode list, and modify the alarm level of this alarm mode, as shown in Figure 108.

3. Click Apply to confirm the modification.

F I G U R E 108 AG E N T E X T E R N AL AL AR M SE T T I N G D I AL O G B O X

Page 199: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 183

[Result]

If the equipment hardware cables are connected correctly, the corresponding alarm information will be shown on the EMS when the alarm is generated.

Setting Alarm Auto Acknowledgement Time [Purpose]

The alarm auto acknowledgement time can range from one day to three days.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, click the System -> System Config menu item to enter the System Management dialog box.

2. Click the Alarm Time tab to enter the Alarm Time page.

3. Input the auto acknowledgement time.

4. Click the Apply button to apply the configuration.

[Result]

If the user does not acknowledge the alarm within the time configured, the system will acknowledge it automatically.

Setting Alarm Diagnose Rule [Purpose]

The reason of alarms and possible solution are provided in the alarm diagnose rule. Users can also add, modify or delete the reason, diagnosis method or solutions according to actual situations.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

To query the alarm diagnose rule:

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Diagnose Rule Setting to pop up the Alarm Diagnose Config dialog box, as shown in Figure 109.

Page 200: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

184 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 109 AL AR M D I AG N O S E C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

2. Double click the alarm to be queried in the list box at the left of the dialog box according to the NE type and detection point.

To add, modify or delete the reason, diagnosis method or solution in the diagnosis rule:

1. Click the alarm to be modified in the list box at the left of the Alarm Diagnose Config dialog box.

2. Click the Add button to pop up the Alarm Diagnose Information Setting dialog box.

3. Input the reason, diagnose method and handle method, and then click the button OK.

4. Or select an original diagnosis rule, and click the Update button to pop up the Alarm Diagnose Information Setting dialog box. And then modify the information in it.

5. Or select a diagnosis rule, and click the Delete button to delete it.

6. After all operations, click the button Apply to confirm and save the operations.

Setting Email or Short Message Output of Alarm [Purpose]

Take the alarm card, alarm severity, and alarm type as the alarm output conditions. When the EMS detects an alarm that meets the conditions, it will notify the operator by means of email or short message.

Page 201: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 185

[Prerequisite]

There should be an environment variable named “AlarmOutput”. By default, this variable does not exist and the Alarm Output menu item is not displayed in the EMS.

In the email mode, the EMS computer must communicate normally with the SMTP server.

In the short message mode, the serial port of the EMS computer must be connected with a module to send the short message.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Output to pop up the Alarm Output dialog box.

2. Click the New button to pop up the Alarm Output Filter dialog box. Create an alarm output task, and select the NE, card, alarm reason, time and prompt mode (email or short message).

3. According to the notification mode, perform the following communication configurations.

In the email mode, click the Comm Set button in the Alarm Output dialog box, and set the STMP server in the Alarm Output Communication Set dialog box.

In the short message mode, click the Comm Set button in the Alarm Output dialog box, and set the serial port number and short message center number in the Alarm Output Communication Set dialog box.

4. Click Apply to confirm the configuration.

[Result]

After setting the alarm output mode and condition, the system will notify the user by the means of an email or a short message if the relevant alarm is generated.

Detecting Free AU [Purpose]

When there is the protection path in the transmission network, Free AU detecting can detect whether the protection path is normal or not ahead. Under the SNCI mode, AU-AIS is sent to free AU path by default. For example, NEA is docking with NEB and the free path of NEA sends AU-AIS, if NEB sets the function of detecting free AU, then NEB would detect the AU-AIS and report to EMS as well.

The alarm of AU path does not be detected by default.

Page 202: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

186 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

[Applicable NEs]

The applicable NEs are ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S200 and ZXMP S325.

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Free AU Detecting Alarm Setting to go to Free AU Detecting Alarm Setting dialog box.

2. Select board from Board list box.

3. In UnDetecting list box, click the port of free AU path to be detected,

and then click button to add the selected port to the Detecting list box; on the other side, click the port in Detecting list box, and then click

button to return the selected port to the UnDetecting list box.

4. Click Apply button to send the command.

[Result]

If the protection path is normally, the AU_AIS alarm can be detected then.

Alarm Query This section introduces the operations of querying current alarms, history alarms, protection switching event, over-threshold alarms and circuit-related alarms.

Querying Current Alarms [Purpose]

To query current alarms; acknowledge, clear, or print the alarm information.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

The following four methods can be used to query the current alarms.

Querying through the Current Alarm sub-page

Select the refresh radio button on the lower left to turn it into . The current alarms and the over threshold alarms in the network will be shown in real time in the Current Alarm sub-page of the client operation window, as shown in Figure 110.

Page 203: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 187

F I G U R E 110 C L I E N T OP E R AT I O N W I N D O W (C U R R E N T AL AR M S U B -PAG E )

Querying current alarms through the alarm buttons on the status board

i. Click the alarm button ( ) to display the menu items of the unacknowledged critical alarms and total alarms, as shown in Figure 111.

F I G U R E 111 QU E R Y I N G AL AR M S TH R O U G H S T AT U S B O AR D (1 )

ii. Select a menu item, and the Current Alarm Management dialog box will pop up. Take Figure 111 as an example, select Total Critical Alarms: 63, the dialog box pops up as shown in Figure 112.

Page 204: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

188 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 112 QU E R Y I N G AL AR M S TH R O U G H S T AT U S B O AR D (2 )

iii. Click the Condition button in the dialog box to filter the alarm information in the pop-up dialog box.

iv. Click the AckAll or Ack button in the dialog box to confirm all alarms or the selected alarms.

v. Click the button to print the alarm messages while the report server is running.

vi. Right-click an alarm message to display the short-cut menu, including the menu items Alarm Mask, Alarm Standby, Alarm Filter, Affected Path and Anchor NE.

Querying the alarms through the alarm statistic function

i. Select an NE in the client operation window, select Alarm -> Alarm Statistic in the menu to display the Alarm Statistic dialog box, where all acknowledged alarms, unacknowledged alarms, locked alarms and acknowledged history alarm in the entire network will be shown in a list.

ii. Click the icon in front of the option (All Nes or an individual alarm NE) in the Resource column, and the critical, major, minor and warning alarms will be displayed, as shown in Figure 113.

Page 205: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 189

F I G U R E 113 AL AR M S T AT I S T I C D I AL O G B O X

iii. Click in the Browse column to display the menu items. Select a menu item, the dialog box as shown in Figure 112 will pop up, where you can query detailed alarm information of the selected alarm severity.

Querying the alarms of a single NE through the current alarm management function

i. Select an NE in the client operation window, select the menu item Alarm -> Current Alarm to enter the AllAlarm page in the Current Alarm Management dialog box, where all alarms of the selected NE will be displayed in real time, as shown in Figure 114.

Page 206: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

190 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 114 C U R R E N T AL A R M M AN AG E M E N T D I AL O G B O X ( AL L AL AR M P AG E )

ii. Click the Condition button to filter the alarm information in the pop-up dialog box.

iii. Click the AckAll or Ack button in the dialog box to confirm all alarms or the selected alarms.

iv. Click the button to print the alarm messages while the report server is running.

v. Right-click an alarm message to display the short-cut menu, including Alarm Mask, Alarm Standby, Alarm Filter, Affected Path and Anchor NE.

Tip: You can also pop up the Current Alarm Management dialog box by the following method:

Right-click an NE icon in the client operation window, or right-click the card in the Card Management dialog box to display the short-cut menu.

Select Current Alarm in the menu to pop up the Current Alarm Management dialog box.

[Result]

User can query the current alarm at the EMS side, and perform the operations on the alarms by button and shortcut menu in the dialog box.

Page 207: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 191

Querying History Alarms [Purpose]

To query history alarms; acknowledge, clear, or print the alarm information.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

The following two methods can be used to query the history alarms.

Querying history alarms through the history alarm statistic function

i. Select an NE in the client operation window, select the menu item Alarm -> History Alarm Statistic to enter the Condition page in the History Alarm Statistic page;

ii. Set the query conditions in the Condition page, such as the alarm severity, alarm type, detection point, alarm reason, alarm time, alarm NE, and alarm card.

You can also query the alarms through filtering. The query conditions are user-defined.

iii. Click the Query button and enter the Result page of the History Alarm Statistic dialog box, where the history alarm statistics meeting the query conditions is displayed.

The statistics can be displayed in the form of graph or table. Figure 115 shows an example of table.

F I G U R E 115 H I S T O R Y AL A R M S T AT I S T I C D I AL O G B O X

Page 208: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

192 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Querying history alarms of a single NE through the history alarm management function

i. Select an NE in the client operation window, select the menu item Alarms -> History Alarm to enter the Alarm Management dialog box.

ii. Click the Query button, and all history alarms from 0:0:0 of the day to the current moment will be displayed by default, as shown in Figure 116.

F I G U R E 116 H I S T O R Y AL A R M D I AL O G B O X

Query history alarms based on specified conditions:

Click the button above the resource list box at the left of the Alarm Management dialog box, all NEs and corresponding cards will be listed in the resource box.

Select the NE or cards to be queried, and then click the button to add the query conditions.

In the History Alarm area, set the querying conditions, such as time, severity level, acknowledgement status, detection point, alarming reason and begin time.

Then click the Query button to query the history alarms meeting the set conditions.

Click Ack to acknowledge the selected alarms.

Click Delete to delete the selected alarms.

Right-click an alarm message to display the short-cut menu, including Alarm Mask, Alarm Standby, Alarm Filter, Affected Path and Anchor NE.

Click to print the alarm while the report server is running.

Page 209: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 193

[Result]

User can query the history alarm at the EMS side, and perform the operations on the alarms by button and shortcut menu in the dialog box.

Querying Locked Alarms [Purpose]

The locked alarms refer to the history alarms unacknowledged.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

The following two methods can be used to query locked alarms:

Query locked alarms through the alarm statistic function.

i. Select an NE in the client operation window, select Alarm -> Alarm Statistic in the menu to enter the Alarm Statistic dialog box. The number of All NEs and the number of locked alarms of the selected NEs are listed in the Alarm Statistic dialog box.

ii. Click the Condition button to pop up the Alarm Statistic Filter dialog box.

iii. Select the Display Locked Alarm check box and click the Apply button.

iv. Click Close to return to the Alarm Statistic dialog box, and the Locked Alarm column will be added into the list, as shown in Figure 117.

Page 210: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

194 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 117 AL AR M S T AT I S T I C D I AL O G B O X (LO C K E D AL AR M )

Expand All Nes or select a specific NE, and click of the Browse column.

Click Lock Alarm in the browse menu to display the Alarm Management dialog box, where the locked alarms of the severity level will be displayed.

Querying locked alarms through the short-cut menu of the NE

Right click an NE in the navigation tree or the topology in the client operation window, and select the menu item Lock Alarm Management in the pop-up shortcut menu to display the Alarm Management dialog box, where the unacknowledged history alarms of the NE will be displayed.

[Result]

The locked alarm can be queried in the dialog box then.

Querying Protection Switching Events [Purpose]

The protection switching events include the MSP switching event, SNCP switching event, card switching event, RPR switching event, ATM switching event, clock source switching event and LSP switching event of the SDH NE.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

To query current protection switching events:

Page 211: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 195

1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Alarm -> Current Protection Switch Event to pop up the Current Protection Switch Event dialog box; Select the type of the protection switching event, and click Query to query the current protection switching events of the NE.

2. Click the Event tab in the client operation window to enter the Event sub-page, all the current protection switching events in the network will be displayed. The displayed information covers the event status (arise or disappear), NE name, information of the protected card, switching type, event type, switching status and time. You can also refresh or clear the events.

To query history protection switching events:

1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Alarm -> History Protection Switch Event to pop up the History Protection Switch Event dialog box;

2. Select the type of the protection switching event and the time range to be queried;

3. Click the button Query to query the history protection switching events of the NE.

[Result]

The current PSE or history PSE can be queried then.

Querying Over Threshold Alarms [Purpose]

When the performance value exceeds the set threshold, the NE will report an over threshold alarm.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

To query current over threshold alarms

There are four methods to query current over threshold alarms as follows.

Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Alarm -> Current Over Threshold Alarm to enter the Current Over Threshold Alarm dialog box; Set alarm severity level, acknowledge information, detecting point and alarm reason, etc., then click Query to query the current over threshold alarms of the NE.

Right-click an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select Current Over Threshold Alarm in the pop-up short-cut menu to display the Current Over Threshold Alarm dialog box; Then click Query to query the current over threshold alarms of the NE.

Page 212: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

196 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

In the Alarm sub-page (as shown in Figure 110) in the client operation window, all the current over threshold alarms of the network will be displayed with the refresh radio button selected.

On the status board (as shown in Figure 110) in the client operation

window, the blinking of the button indicates there is a new over threshold alarm being reported.

Click the button, and then query the detailed alarm message in the pop-up NE Selection dialog box.

To query history over threshold alarms

1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, select the menu item Alarm -> History Over Threshold Alarm to enter the History Over Threshold Alarm dialog box;

2. Set alarm severity level, acknowledge information, detecting point and alarm reason, etc., and then click Query to query the history over threshold alarms of the NE.

Note: For query on condictions

In the Current Over Threshold Alarm or the History Over Threshold Alarm dialog box, the query conditions can be set as those in the Current Alarm or History Alarm dialog box.

[Result]

The current over threshold alarm or history over threshold alarm can be queried then.

Analyzing Circuit Alarm Correlativity [Purpose]

The correlativity between circuit alarms of an NE can be queried and analyzed.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

To query and analyze the correlativity of all circuit alarms for an NE

1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Alarm -> Alarm Analysis to pop up the Analysis config dialog box.

2. Click the Next to enter the Result dialog box after analyzing.

To analyze the related alarms of an alarm

Page 213: SDH Configuration

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 197

1. In client operation window, select an SDH NE and click Alarm-> Current Alarm menu item to pop up Current Alarm Management dialog box.

2. Select an alarm message in the Current Alarm Management dialog box, and click the Analysis button to analyze the selected alarm.

[Result]

The result dialog box pops up to display the detailed information of the correlative alarms and the non-correlative alarms, as shown in Figure 118.

F I G U R E 118 R E S U L T D I AL O G B O X (C I R C U I T AL AR M AN AL Y S I S )

Page 214: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

198 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 215: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 199

C h a p t e r 7

Performance Management

This chapter describes the operation method and process for performance configuration and performance query in ZXONM E300.

Performance Configuration Setting Digital Performance Threshold [Purpose]

Digital performance refers to parameters that reflect the transmission and traffic quality, such as channels, interfaces. In the operation of the equipment, the digital performance is detected by the MCU of cards, which also performs statistics on the performance values. The performance statistical period can be 15 minutes or 24 hours.

In ZXONM E300, each performance threshold has a default value, which is downloaded to the NCP card of the NE while the system downloads the database at the first time.

The 15 minutes or 24 hours performance threshold of the performance items can be modified and then downloaded to the NCP with commands.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example.

[Steps]

1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Config -> Parameter Performance Threshold to pop up the Digital Threshold dialog box.

2. Select the detection cycle to “15 Minutes”.

3. Click the icon before the detection point “RS”.

Page 216: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

200 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

4. Set the high threshold of UAS to “900” in the list box, as shown in Figure 119.

5. Click the Apply button to confirm the configuration.

F I G U R E 119 P E R F O R M AN C E TH R E S H O L D D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

When the MCU of NE D detects the 15 minutes performance value of UAS is greater than or equals to 1000, the NE D will report the UAS over threshold alarm.

Setting Analog Performance Threshold [Purpose]

The analog performance refers to parameters that embody the working conditions of physical components or circuits, such as the receiving and transmitting optical power of a laser. Generally, there is an higher threshold and a lower threshold for each analog parameter.

As the quantity of analog parameters can not be accumulated during a period, the difference between the analog value and reference is taken as the criterion to judge whether it is normal.

The thresholds of analog performance items of a specific card can be modified through the analog performance threshold command.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S360, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S385, and ZXMP S200 NEs that are online and can communicate with the EMS normally

Page 217: SDH Configuration

Chapter 7 - Performance Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 201

Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. To modify the lower threshold for the input optical power of port 1 on OL16[1-1-1] card to –35 dBm.

[Steps]

1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Config -> Analog Performance Threshold to pop up the Analog Performance Threshold dialog box.

2. Select “OL16[1-1-1]” in the card list.

3. Click Default to display all analog performance items of OL16[1-1-1] in the dialog box.

4. Set the lower threshold of input optical power of Port 1 to “-35”.

5. Click the Apply button to confirm the configuration.

[Result]

The OL16[1-1-1] card will report the input power over threshold alarm when the input optical power on port 1 is lower than -35 dBm.

Resetting Performance Register [Purpose]

The NCP card of an NE will clear the local performance register after receiving the reset command delivered by the manager, and the performance statistics will be relaunched.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs that are online and can communicate with the EMS normally

Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. To clear the 15-minute performance value for the RS signal deterioration performance item on port 1 of OL16[1-1-1].

[Result]

1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Config -> Performance Register Reset to pop up the Performance Register Reset dialog box.

2. Select “OL16[1-1-1]” in the Detection Card drop-down list box;

3. Select “RS” in the Detection Point drop-down list box, and this card is added in the Source Card list box;

4. Select “signal deteriorated(SD)” in the Performance item drop-down list box;

5. Select “1# Port” in the Source Card list box;

Page 218: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

202 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

6. Select “15 Minutes” as the granularity cycle;

7. Click Add to add the selected performance item to the performance register reset list.

8. Click Apply to confirm the configuration, as shown in Figure 120.

F I G U R E 120 P E R F O R M AN C E R E G I S T E R RE S E T D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

In the Performance Management dialog box, query the 15 minutes performance of the RS signal deterioration item on port 1 of NE D OL16[1-1-1]. The register for the performance value should be recounted.

Restraining Zero Performance [Purpose]

Set whether to report the history performance item whose quantity is 0. Be default, the item of zero performance is not reported. This operation is only applicable to online SDH NEs that are in normal communications with the EMS.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs that are online and can communicate with the EMS normally

Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. To clear the zero-performance restrain status of OL16[1-1-1] and enable the reporting of the zero-performance item.

Page 219: SDH Configuration

Chapter 7 - Performance Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 203

[Steps]

1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Config -> Zero Performance Restrain to pop up the Zero-Performance Restrain dialog box.

2. Unselect Restrain of the OL16 [1-1-1] in the History 15M Zero-Pfm column.

3. Click Apply to confirm the configuration as shown in Figure 121

F I G U R E 121 ZE R O -P E R F O R M AN C E R E S T R AI N D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

Query the history 15-minute performance of NE D OL16[1-1-1] in the History Performance page in the Performance Management dialog box. The zero-performance should be shown in the list.

Masking Performance [Purpose]

If a performance item is masked, it will not be reported to the EMS. The masking command is sent to corresponding card of the NE. The default status of each performance is unmasked.

Caution: The card does not report any masked performance item to the EMS and this will influence normal supervision of network operation. Therefore, performance mask in network operation should be avoided or this operation should be canceled in time once the operation goal is achieved.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Page 220: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

204 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. To mask all performance on port 1 of OL16[1-1-1].

[Steps]

1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Config -> Performance Mask to pop up the Performance Mask dialog box.

2. Select “OL16[1-1-1]” in the Detection Card drop-down list box;

3. Select “RS” in the Detection Point drop-down list box, and the card is added into the Source Card list box;

4. Select “Select all” in the Performance item drop-down list box;

5. Select “1# Port” in the Source Card list box;

6. Select the performance type as “Digital Performance”, and then click Add to add all performance to the performance mask list.

7. Click Apply to confirm the configuration as shown in Figure 122.

F I G U R E 122 P E R F O R M AN C E M AS K D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

NE D does not report the RS performance of port 1 of OL16[1-1-1] card to the EMS. Double-click NE D in the client operation window. In the Card Management dialog box, the OL16[1-1-1] card is indicated with the performance mask identifier .

Setting Performance Collection Time [Purpose]

Set the collection interval of 15-minute performance or the starting time of 24-hour performance collection for the SDH NEs.

Page 221: SDH Configuration

Chapter 7 - Performance Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 205

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

To set the 15-minute performance collection interval

1. In the client operation window, click the menu item System -> System Config to enter the System Management dialog box.

2. Click the Performance Time tab to enter the Performance Time page.

3. Input the performance collection interval.

4. Click the Apply button to apply the configuration.

To set the 24-hour performance collection starting time

1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Config -> NE 24 Hours History Performance Collection Time to pop up the NE 24-Hour Performance Collection Time dialog box.

2. Enter the start time in the Set collection start time text box (with the time precision as second, the default collection time is 00:00:00).

3. Click the Apply button to confirm the configuration.

[Result]

For the 15-minute performance collection time, the manager should collect the history 15-minute performance of all NEs at the set time.

For the 24-hour performance collection time, the manager should collect the 24-hour performance of the NE at the set time.

Setting SNC Switching [Purpose]

In the higher order path protection ring, the protection switching can be performed based on switching conditions after setting the subnet connection (SNC) switching conditions. It is only applicable to ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, and ZXMP S385.

Note: For other SDH NEs, the SNC switching conditions can not be set. The SNC (I) is the default switching condition for them.

The SNC switching conditions include:

SNC (I) (SNC protection with inherent supervision)

Page 222: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

206 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

If the receiving end detects the Service layer Signal Failure (SSF) alarm, the traffic will be forced to switch. The SSF alarm is caused by Loss of Pointer (LOP) and the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).

SNC (I) is the default switching condition of SNC.

Signal Deterioration (SD)

If an SD alarm is detected on the channel, a forced switching will occur.

By default, the SD will not lead to channel switching.

SNC (N) (SNC protection with non-intrusive supervision)

If the receiving end detects a Track Signal Failure (TSF) or Track Signal Deterioration (TSD) alarm, a forced switching will occur. The TSF is caused by the SSF, UNEQ or TIM alarm, and the TSD is caused by the SD alarm.

By default, the UNEQ, TIM and SD alarm will not cause path switching.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S360, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S200.

Other SDH NEs take SNC (I) as the switching condition and the SNC Switch Config menu item is not applicable to them.

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Config -> SNC Switch Config to pop up the SNC Switch Config dialog box.

2. Select the cross-connect card, electrical interface card or Ethernet card in the card drop-down list box according to the channel type of the switching ring.

To set the AU channel, select a cross-connect card.

To set the TU channel, select corresponding electric interface card or Ethernet card.

3. Select the AU channel or the electrical interface in the Default list for the switching configuration.

4. Click SD>> to add the selected items to the Configed list. The switching condition for the selected channel or port is SNC (I)+SD.

5. Click SNC(N)>> to add the selected items to the Configed list. The switching condition for the selected channel or port is SNC (N).

6. Click Apply to confirm the configuration. The switching condition for ports 1 - 3 on the ET1 is SNC (I) and SD, as shown in Figure 123.

Page 223: SDH Configuration

Chapter 7 - Performance Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 207

F I G U R E 123 SNC S W I T C H C O N F I G D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

Take Figure 123 as example. When ports 1 - 3 on the ET1[1-1-1] card of the NE ZXMP_S330 detect an SD, LOP or AIS alarm, the switching will occur.

Setting Data Flow Supervision Parameter [Purpose]

The data flow of a VLAN can be supervised and queried separately while querying current performances after setting the VLAN ID. This function is applicable to ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390 configured with RSEB card while they are online and in normal communication with the EMS.

In the Current Performance page of the Performance Management dialog box, you can query the add bytes to ringlet 0, add bytes to ringlet 1, drop bytes to ringlet 0, drop bytes to ringlet 1, transit bytes to ringlet 0, transit bytes to ringlet 1 of corresponding data flow of the specified VLAN.

The granularity cycle can be the 24-Hour Perf, current 15-Min Perf, history 15-Min Perf.

[Applicable NEs]

Online ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390 NEs equipped with RSEB card which is communicating with the EMS normally

[Steps]

1. Select an applicable NE in the client operation window.

2. Select the menu item Performance -> Performance Config -> Rpr Board Traff AdminPara Setting to pop up corresponding dialog box.

Page 224: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

208 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

3. Select the RSEB card in the Board drop-down list box, and input the start ID and end ID to be supervised in VLAN Start ID and VLAN End ID.

4. Click the Add button, and then click the Apply to confirm the configuration, as shown in Figure 124.

F I G U R E 124 R P R B O AR D T R AF F AD M I N PAR A S E T T I N G D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

After configuration, the performances of this VLAN ID can be queried in the Current Performance page of the Performance Management dialog box.

Performance Query Querying Current Performance [Purpose]

The current performance of SDH NEs includes current 15-minute/24-hour performance (analog and digital), current 15-minute/24-hour analog performance, and current 15-minute/24-hour digital performance.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

Page 225: SDH Configuration

Chapter 7 - Performance Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 209

1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Current Performance to pop up the Performance Management dialog box, as shown in Figure 125.

F I G U R E 125 P E R F O R M AN C E M AN AG E M E N T D I AL O G B O X (W I T H QU E R Y R E S U L T )

2. Click the Query button to query the current 15-minute performances of all cards in the NE by default.

3. Or query current performances meeting specified conditions:

i. Click the button on top of the Resource list box, and then all NEs and corresponding cards are listed in the box;

ii. Select the NE or cards to be queried, and lick the button to add corresponding query conditions;

iii. Set the granularity cycle, detection points and items;

iv. In the Policy drop-down list box, select the predefined file of query conditions. Clicking the Snapshot button can set query conditions;

4. Click the Query button to display the performance messages meeting

the query conditions. When the report server is running, click the button to print the performance messages.

[Result]

The current performance can be queried according to the querying conditions when the NE is online and the communication is normal between the NE and EMS.

Querying History Performance [Purpose]

Page 226: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

210 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The query types of history performance are described in Table 79.

T AB L E 79 QU E R Y TY P E S O F SDH NES

Parameters Descriptions

Granularity Cycle Two options: 15 minutes or 24 hours

Performance Type Three options: Performance (including both digital performance and analog performance), Digital Performance, Analog Performance.

EMS database: Query the history performance messages that meet the query conditions in the current EMS database. It is the default data source. The NCP database uploads its data to the EMS database periodically. It requires that the NE must be online.

NCP history data: First upload the NCP data to the EMS database. Then query the history performance messages that meet the query conditions. It requires that the NE must be online.

Data Source

Backup information: Query the history performance messages in the backup file saved locally. The NE can be offline.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> History Performance to pop up the Performance Management dialog box.

2. In the History Performance page, click the Apply button to query the history 15-minute performances of all cards in the NE from the time 0:0:0 of the day to current time by default.

Tip: You can also access the History Performance page by clicking the History Performance tab in the Performance Management dialog box.

3. Or query current performances meeting specified conditions:

i. Click the button above the Resource list box, and then all NEs and corresponding cards are listed in the box;

ii. Select the NE or cards to be queried, and lick the button to add corresponding query conditions;

iii. Set the granularity cycle, time period, detection points and items;

iv. In the Policy drop-down list box, select the predefined file of query conditions;

Page 227: SDH Configuration

Chapter 7 - Performance Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 211

v. Check the Query NCP History Data check box to query the history data saved on NCP card;

vi. Select Show beyond Benchmark Perf to filter the history performances in the current page, that is, only the history data which is beyond the benchmark performance is displayed in red.

vii. Click the BackInfo tab. Check the Include Backup Information check box to activate the BackInfo combo box. Select the location of the backup file.

4. Click the Query button to display the performance messages meeting

the query conditions. When the report server is running, click the button to print the performance messages.

Setting Performance Statistics [Purpose]

The performance statistic of SDH NEs includes history 15-minute performance, history 24-hour performance and history 15-minute analog performance.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Statistic the performance based on query condition

i. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Statistics to pop up the Performance Statistics dialog box.

ii. Set the begin time and end time of performance statistics in the Begin Time and End Time text box respectively.

iii. Click the Condition button to enter the Condition dialog box, and set the detection card, detection point, performance item, source card and performance cycle in it.

iv. Click Apply and Close button to return to the Performance Statistics dialog box, and then the statistic result is displayed in the form of list.

v. Click Query button, then the query result will be displayed in the Performance Statistic dialog box.

vi. Click the Graph button to enter the Performance Graph dialog box, and the result will be shown in the form of graph.

2. Statistic performance based on backup file

i. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Statistics to pop up the Performance Statistics dialog box.

Page 228: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

212 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

ii. Set the begin time and end time of performance statistics in the Begin Time and End Time text box respectively.

iii. Select Query Backup File check box to activate BackInfo button.

iv. Click BackInfo button to pop up BackInfo dialog box. If the backup file is saved in the default directory, the inputting box displays the default file directory; if the backup file is saved in the customized directory, click Check Default Director radio button to cancel the default directory and then input the backup file directory.

v. Click Ok button in BackInfo dialog box to return to Performance Statistic dialog box.

vi. Click Query button, then the query result will be displayed in the Performance Statistic dialog box.

vii. Click the Graph button to enter the Performance Graph dialog box, and the result will be shown in the form of graph.

[Result]

ZXONM E300 supports various performance graphs, for instance, fold-line graph, polygonal graph, trapezoid graph, 3-D histogram, 2-D histogram and scattered point graph.

Setting Performance Prediction [Purpose]

Predict the 24-hour performance at some time in future according to the current performance data. The predict time is 7 days at most.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Warning to pop up the Performance Warning dialog box.

2. Set the beginning date of the history data, prediction days, detection card, detection card, performance type, and source card.

3. Click the Add button to add the prediction condition to the performance prediction list.

4. Click the Apply button.

[Result]

After prediction, the Performance warning result dialog box will pop up to display the prediction result.

Page 229: SDH Configuration

Chapter 7 - Performance Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 213

Setting Performance Task Management [Purpose]

Create a task to specify conditions, so that the EMS can make statistics on performance at the background according to the requirements in the performance task. The performance statistics can be displayed in the form of list or graph.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. To get the statistics of RS 15-minute performance on port 1 of OL16[1-1-1] card with the time ranging 2005-7-02 to 2005-7-06.

[Steps]

1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Performance -> Performance Task to pop up the Performance Task dialog box.

2. Click New to enter the New Task dialog box.

3. Set the parameters for the performance task in accordance with those in Table 80.

T AB L E 80 P E R F O R M AN C E T AS K P AR AM E T E R S E T T I N G

Parameter Setting

Name test

Granularity cycle 15 minutes

From (start time of the performance statistics) 2005, 7, 2, 15, 00, 00

To (end time of the performance statistics) 2005, 7, 6, 15, 00, 00

Detection card OL16[1-1-1]

Detection point RS

Performance type Select all

Source card 1#Port

4. Click Add to add the selected performance item to the performance task list.

5. Click Apply in the New Task box to save the configuration and return to the Performance Task dialog box, as shown in Figure 126.

6. Click the Apply button in the Performance Task dialog box.

Then the update column is null, indicating the task is running at the background. When “End” is displayed in the Status column, the task is completed.

Page 230: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

214 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 126 P E R F O R M AN C E T AS K D I AL O G B O X

[Result]

In the Performance Task dialog box as shown in Figure 126, select the task “test”, and then click the Statistic button to display the task statistic in the form of list in the dialog box as shown in Figure 127.

Click Graph to display the Performance Graph dialog box, where the statistics is shown in the form of graph.

F I G U R E 127 TAS K S T AT I S T I C R E S U L T D I AL O G B O X

Page 231: SDH Configuration

Chapter 7 - Performance Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 215

State Management Querying Card Running State [Purpose]

VCG of data board can be queried at real time.

[Applicable NE]

ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item Performance -> Card Running State Management-> Current State Management to go to Current State Management dialog box.

2. Select board to be queried in Resource list box, and then click the right direction arrow to apply the selected board.

3. Click Refresh button, then the current VCG states are displayed in VCG State list box.

[Result]

Current running state of board can be displayed in VCG State list box.

Querying History Running State [Purpose]

Query the VCG states of all or specified boards of all or specified NEs, and also all VCG states in some historical period.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item Performance -> Card Running State Management-> History State Management to go to History State Management dialog box.

2. Select board to be queried in Resource list box, and then click the right direction arrow to apply the selected board.

3. Set query type, query time, detection point, query NCP history data or query the history data in backup file.

Page 232: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

216 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

4. Click Query button, the queried history VCG states are displayed in VCG State list box.

[Result]

The queried VCG states can be displayed in VCG State list box.

Setting State Mask [Purpose]

VCG state report and display can be masked.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item Performance -> Card Running State Management-> State Mask Setting to go to State Mask Setting dialog box.

2. Select Type, Board, Detection Point Type and State Source.

3. Click Add button to add the selected board and port to the mask list.

4. Click Apply button to send the commands.

[Result]

The state of VCG (EOS) port configured with state mask can not be queried.

Setting State Threshold [Purpose]

Query and set the threshold of VCG state.

Once the fault number of VCG resource/destination is beyond the specified threshold, the board would report loss part of capacity of VCG resource alarm and loss part of capacity of VCG destination alarm to notify the user of exceeding faults. VCG state threshold can be set according to each NE. The default threshold of VCG faults is 50%.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390

Page 233: SDH Configuration

Chapter 7 - Performance Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 217

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item Performance -> Card Running State Management-> Set State Threshold to go to Set State Threshold dialog box.

2. Click “+” before Type:VCG to collapse the type tree.

3. Click Threshold area to set the threshold value.

4. Click Apply button to send the commands.

[Result]

If the number of faults of VCG resource or VCG destination is beyond the threshold, loss part of capacity of VCG resource alarm and loss part of capacity of VCG destination alarm can be queried by the current alarm management.

Page 234: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

218 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 235: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 219

C h a p t e r 8

Maintenance Operations

This chapter introduces maintenance operations of SDH NEs.

Note: Attention please! Any misoperation of maintenance may cause service interruption or equipment malfunction. Please Read this chapter carefully before performing maintenance operations.

Setting Loopback [Purpose]

Through the loopback of an optical channel or tributary, the traffic is transmitted from the transmitting port and received at the receiving port of the NE. In the case of separating the communication links, the loopback can be used to confirm the fault point of NEs and detect the working status of nodes and transmission lines in the network.

Note: The loopback operation may result in traffic interruption, therefore be careful while performing the loopback operation.

The operation principle of loopback is that keep the influences on traffic as little as possible. For example, if a fault can be located through a tributary unit loopback, the AU loopback should be avoided.

Loopback type

The loopback is divided into line loopback and terminal loopback depending on the flow direction of signals between transmitting and receiving ports.

The loopback from an optical line card to an optical port of it is the line loopback, while the loopback in the opposite direction is the terminal loopback.

Page 236: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

220 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The loopback from an electrical tributary card to an electrical tributary port of it is the terminal loopback, while the loopback in the opposite direction is the line loopback, as shown in Figure 128.

F I G U R E 128 LO O P B AC K D I R E C T I O N S

Relations between loopback points and cards

T AB L E 81 R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N LO O P B AC K P O I N T S AN D C AR D S

Loopback Point

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

ZXMP S330 ZXMP S325

ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320

ZXMP S100 ZXMP S310

ZXMP S200 ZXMP S385

Port OL64, OL16 Optical line card - - - Optical line

card/EL1 Optical line card/LP1

VC11 - TT1 - 1.5M electrical interface card - TT1

1.5M electrical interface card

VC12

ET1

SGE2B

SFE8

ET1

SFE

EP1

SFE8

SFE4B

2M electrical interface card /SFE4/SFE4B

Tributary card ET1

2M electrical interface card/ SGEB/SFE8

VC3 -

ET3

TT3

ETT3

EP3

ET3

34M/45M electrical interface card

- -

34M/45M electrical interface card

VC4 ET4 ET4 EP4 - - - -

VC3-nc TGE2B - - - - - TGE2B

VC4-nc RSEA - OI16 /OL4 - - - -

AU3-nc - Optical line card - - - Optical line

card Optical line card/TGEB

AU4-nc Optical line card above STM-4

Optical line card above STM-4

- - - Optical line card

STM-4 optical line card

AU4 (AU3) Optical line Optical line OI16/ES1/ Optical STM-1 Optical line Optical line

Page 237: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 221

Loopback Point

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

ZXMP S330 ZXMP S325

ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320

ZXMP S100 ZXMP S310

ZXMP S200 ZXMP S385

card/EL1 card/EL1/ RSEB

optical line card of other rate

interface card optical interface card

card/ EL1/TFE

card/LP1/SE/RSEB

TU3 SE/RSEB RSEB - - - TFE SE/RSEB

TU12 SE/RSEB RSEB - - - TFE SE/RSEB

Ethernet user port

SGE2B/RSEB/SE/SFE8/ TGEB

SFE/RSEB SFE8/SFE4B SFE4/SFE4B - TFE SGEB/SFE

/TGEB/SE/ RSEB

VCG (EOS) - - - - - TFE -

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take NE E in the networking instance provided in Chapter 1 as an example. To set the loopback for port 1 of the ET1[1-1-2] card.

[Steps]

1. Select NE E in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Set Loopback to access the Set Loopback dialog box.

2. Input or select loopback parameters as given in Table 82.

T AB L E 82 S E T T I N G LO O P B AC K P AR AM E T E R S

Interface Parameter Parameter Setting

Detection Card ET1[1-1-2]

Loopback Type Line Side

Type VC12 Insert Point

Port No. 1

3. Click the Add button to add the loopback configuration.

4. Click the Apply button to confirm the configuration.

Note: For ZXMP S390, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S325 and ZXMP S200, automatic clear and LoopbackTime are available. That is loopback can be automatically cleared after loopback time to avoid the operators forgetting to clear the loopback so that the service will be influenced on.

But ZXMP S100, ZXMP S320 and ZXMP S360do not support this function.

[Result]

Page 238: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

222 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Double-click NE E in the client operation window and the loopback icon is displayed on the card ET1[1-1-2] in the Card Management dialog box.

Checkpoint: After finishing the loopback, it must be cacelled in time; otherwise it will influence traffic.

The icon on the NE icon will disappear when the loopback is cancelled.

Inserting Alarms [Purpose]

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) can be inserted manually to check whether the channel is in good connection or the protection switching is correct. If there is no problem, the corresponding channel of the receiving end should detect the AIS alarm.

Alarm type: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

Relations between alarm insertion points and cards

T AB L E 83 R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N AL AR M I N S E R T I O N P O I N T S AN D C AR D S

Alarm Inser-tion Point

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

ZXMP S330 ZXMP S325

ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320

ZXMP S100 ZXMP S310

ZXMP S200 ZXMP S385

TU11 - TT1 - 1.5M electrical interface card - TT1 1.5M electrical

interface card

TU12

ET1/SGE2B/ SFE8/SE/ RSEB (EOS port)

ET1/SFE/ RSEB

EP1/SFE8/ SFE4B

2M electrical interface card/SFE4/SFE4B

Tributary card ET1/TFE

2M electrical interface card/SFE/ SFEB/SE/ RSEB

TU3 ET3/TT3/SE/ RSEB

ET3/TT3/ ETT3/RSEB EP3/ET3

34M/45M electrical interface card

- TFE

34M/45M electrical interface card/SE/RSEB

MS Optical line card/ EL1/ATMcard

Optical line card/EL1/ ATM card

OI16/ES1/ optical line card of other rate/ATM card

Optical interface card/ATM card

- Optical line card/EL1

Optical line card/LP1/ ATM card

VC4-nc RSEA - OI16/OL4 - - - -

AU3-nc Optical line card/TGE2B

Optical line card - - - Optical line

card Optical line card

AU4-nc Optical line card above STM-4

Optical line card above STM-4

- - - Optical line card

Optical line card above STM-4

AU4/ Optical line Optical line OI16/ES1/ Optical STM-1 Optical line Optical line

Page 239: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 223

Alarm Inser-tion Point

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

ZXMP S330 ZXMP S325

ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320

ZXMP S100 ZXMP S310

ZXMP S200 ZXMP S385

AU3 card/EL1/ ATM card/ SE/RSEB

card/EL1/ RSEB/ATM card

optical line card of other rate/ATM card

interface card/ATM card

optical interface card

card/ EL1/TFE

card/LP1/ ATM card/SE/RSEB

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take NE C in the networking instance provided in Chapter 1 as an example.To insert an alarm to OL64[1-1-3] of NE C.

[Steps]

1. Select NE C in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Insert Alarm to access the Insert Alarm dialog box.

2. Set parameters for inserting an alarm as given in Table 84.

T AB L E 84 S E T T I N G P AR AM E T E R S F O R I N S E R T I N G AN AL AR M

Interface Parameter Parameter Setting

Detection Card OL64[1-1-3]

Insertion Type AIS

Type MS Insert Point

Port No. 1

3. Click the Add button.

4. Click the Apply button.

[Result]

In this example, double-click NE C in the client operation window and the alarm insertion icon is displayed on the card OL64[1-1-3] in the Card Management dialog box. In addition, this card reports an AIS alarm.

The corresponding channel of the receiving end reports an AIS alarm.

If insertion type is TU3 and bidirectional traffic is configured, the insertion point will report a Remote Defect Indication (RDI) alarm in addition to the AIS alarm.

In a protected network, the protection switch event can be queried without interrupting any traffic. If the traffic is interrupted, it indicates an abnormity happened during the switch. Check the line or the relevant card.

Page 240: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

224 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Checkpoint: The alarm insertion operation must be cancelled in time; otherwise it will impact traffic.

Inserting Bit Error [Purpose]

Insert a bit error on an optical line or tributary forcibly to check channel quality. For successful insertion, performance values of the bit error can be queried at the abutting end.

Bit error types

Bit errors inserted vary with insertion points, as listed in Table 85

T AB L E 85 B I T E R R O R TY P E S

Bit Error Type Insertion Point

B1 bit error RS

B2 bit error MS

B3 bit error VC3, VC4, VC4-nc, and VC3-nc

V5 bit error VC12 and VC11

Relations between insertion points and cards

T AB L E 86 R E L AT I O N B E T W E E N I N S E R T I O N P O I N T S AN D C AR D S

Inser-tion Point

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

ZXMP S330 ZXMP S325

ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320

ZXMP S100 ZXMP S310

ZXMP S200 ZXMP S385

VC11 - TT1 - 1.5M electrical interface card

- TT1 1.5M electrical interface card

VC12 ET1/SGE2B/ SFE8/SE/ RSEB

ET1/SFE/

RSEB EP1/SFE8/ SFE4B

2M electrical interface card /SFE4/SFE4B

Tributary card ET1/TFE

2M electrical interface card /SFE/ SGEB/SE/RSEB

VC3

ET3/TT3/EL1/optical line card/TGE2B/SE/RSEB

ET3/TT3/ETT3/EL1/ optical line card/RSEB

EP3/ET3 34M/45M electrical interface card

- optical line card /EL1/TFE

34M/45M electrical interface card /TGEB/SE/RSEB

VC4

EL1/ optical line card /ATM card/TGE2B/SE/RSEB

EL1/ optical line card/ATM card/RSEB

EP4/

ATM card

Optical interface card/ ATM card

STM-1 optical interface card

optical line card /EL1/TFE

Optical interface card/ATM card/TGEB/SE/RSEB

MS/RS EL1/ optical EL1/ optical OI16/ES1/ Optical - optical optical line card

Page 241: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 225

Inser-tion Point

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

ZXMP S330 ZXMP S325

ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320

ZXMP S100 ZXMP S310

ZXMP S200 ZXMP S385

line card /ATM card

line card /ATM card

optical line card of other rate/ATM card

interface card/ ATM card

line card /EL1

/LP1/ATM card

VC4-nc Optical line card above STM-4/RSEA

Optical line card above STM-4

OI16/OL4 - - optical line card

Optical line card above STM-4

VC3-nc optical line card/TGE2B

optical line card - - - optical

line card optical line card /TGEB

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

Take NE C in the networking instance provided in Chapter 1 as an example.To insert a bit error to 2#AUG of port 1 on OL64[1-1-3] card.

[Steps]

1. Select NE C in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Insert Error Code to access the Insert Error Code dialog box.

2. Set parameters for inserting a bit error as given in Table 87

T AB L E 87 S E T T I N G P AR AM E T E R S F O R I N S E R T I N G A B I T E R R O R

Interface Parameter Parameter Setting

Detection Card OL64[1-1-3]

Type VC4

Port No. 1

Mapping mode AU4 Insert Point

AUG No. 2

3. Click the Add button.

4. Click the Apply button.

[Result]

Bit errors of this type can be queried from the corresponding channel at the receiving end with the current performance management function.

The B2/B3 bit error inserted manually imposes no influence on traffic, and no bit error can be detected by the meters. It can be queried only from the EMS terminal.

Page 242: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

226 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

If the insertion point is a high-order VC3 and is configured as bidirectional traffic, about the same amount of remote bit errors can be detected on the insertion point card.

In this example, double-click NE C in the client operation window and the alarm insertion icon is displayed on the card OL64[1-1-3] in the Card Management dialog box. In addition, the B3 bit error can be queried from 2#AUG on card OL64[1-1-6] of NE B.

Checkpoint: The bit error insertion operation must be cancelled in time; otherwise it will impact traffic.

Setting Protection Switching [Purpose]

For an NE configured with MSP ring, SNCP or RPR protection, execute the protection switching command to force it to deliver the protection switch command. It is applicable to all SDH NEs. However the ZXMP S100 can only conduct the subnet connection protection switching.

Switching commands

Lock: Forbid any access to the protection section/channel.

Force Switch: Unless another switch instruction of equal or higher priority is active, the system will switch to the working/protection section (or channel), no matter whether the section/channel is faulty or not.

Manual Switch: Unless another switch instruction of equal or higher priority is active or the switching section/channel fails, the system will switch to the working/protection section (or channel) as required.

Exercise: Only process the APS protocol without influencing the normal running of network.

Only such MSP switching composed by ZXMP S390, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, or ZXMP S200 supports the switching exercise command.

Switching command priority (higher to lower)

Lock > Force Switch > Manual Switch > Exercise

[Applicable NEs]

It is applicable to all the SDH NEs. Note that for ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S325, MSP, SNCP and RPR switching can be performed. For ZXMP S360 and ZXMP S320, MSP and SNCP are performed. For ZXMP S100, only SNCP is performed.

Page 243: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 227

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Protection Switch to access the Protection Switch dialog box

2. Click the Set SMP Switch tab or the Set SNCP Switch tab according to the protection type of this NE.

3. Select the switch type, switch state, switch mode, source card, port No. and other parameters as needed.

4. Click the Add button.

5. Click the Apply button.

[Result]

If the button on the toolbar of the client operation window is depressed, the icon appears on the NE icon if the source card for performing the switching is an optical line card.

Select the NE in the client operation window and enter the Query Protection Switch State page in the Protection Switch dialog box to query the switching command, which should be the same as the one set before.

Setting APS Operation of MSP [Purpose]

Check, configure the APS ID by APS operation of MSP.The APS ID is the unique ID of an NE in the MSP ring network.

Table 88 lists the meaning of APS operations supported by the ZXONM E300.

T AB L E 88 M E AN I N G S O F APS P AR AM E T E R S

Parameter Meaning

APS start In the case that the APS protocol is working properly, the MP protection ring is working in APS state. When the MSP group is configured, the APS should be started.

APS stop

The APS protocol stops working and keeps the data before stopping. For instance, if MSP switching happens at a site, the original MSP switching operation will be kept after the APS stops, and the new data will not be processed.

APS reset The APS data is cleared completely and the NE data is initialized. After reset, the working status of system recovers. The system waits for new data, and performs automatic protection switching.

Page 244: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

228 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

Refer to the ASP operation described in the section of Configuring Two-fiber Bidirectional MSP in Chapter 1 for the detailed information about the operations of querying and configuring the APS.

Note: The APS operation is only applicable to the MSP ring and the APS command set on each NE in a protection group must be identical.

After the APS is reset successfully, the APS ID should be restarted.

Resetting Cards [Purpose]

The resetting of chips or application programs of cards is divided into the hardware reset and software reset. It is applicable to online NEs in normal communication with the EMS.

Hardware reset: resets all chips in a card by the cable from NCP board to other boards.

Software reset: resets application programs in a card by s interface. For ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390, software reset of CPU level is supported. For ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S325, the software reset is classified into CPU level and IC level reset. The software resetting supported by other types of NEs has no levels like this.

Danger:

The purpose of resetting is to recover the normal working of the card. Therefore, never perform the reset operation unless it is confirmed that the card function is affected by the processor fault.

The software resetting is abnormally under the condition of abnormal S interface, only hardware resetting is available.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Reset Card to access the Reset Card dialog box.

Page 245: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 229

2. Select a card to be reset, and select the reset type.

3. Click the Reset button.

[Result]

Observe the indicator on the front panel of the reset card, which should indicate that the card is in the reset status.

Querying Maintenance State [Purpose]

Query maintenance type and maintenance point of an NE.Maintenance operations include inserting bit errors, inserting alarms and loopback.

[Applicable NEs]

The querying of maintenance state is applicable only to ZXMP S100, ZXMP S320 and ZXMP S385 NEs that are online and in normal communication with the EMS.

[Steps]

Select an NE with maintenance operations performed in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Query Maintenance State to pop up the Query Maintenance State dialog box.

[Result]

Then the maintenance state of the NE will be displayed in the dialog box.

Setting Forced State of CS Card [Purpose]

Generally, two CS (cross-connect) cards are installed in an SDH NE for mutual protection. Use the obliged state command to select a CS card.

Different forced state commands implement different functions, as listed in Table 89.

Page 246: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

230 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 89 CS C AR D FO R C E D S T AT E C O M M AN D S

Main CS Card Standby CS Card NE Slot

No. Card Slot

No. Card Obliged State

ZXMP S380 ZXMP S390

4 CS 5 CS

ZXMP S385 8 CS module

of CS card 9 CS module of CS card

Service bus and overhead bus of these NEs are in multi-bus structure. The CS card forced state command is used to query or force the bus selection.

ZXMP S360 8 CS 9 CS

Query and forced selection of the CS card working state.

ZXMP S320 6 CSB 7 CSB

ZXMP S330 9 CS 10 CS

ZXMP S325 7

CS module of OCSx card

8 CS module of OCSx card

Force the CS card selection, set the switching command, and query the current working CS card.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs except ZXMP S100 and ZXMP S310

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> CSx Card Forced State to access the CSx Card Forced State dialog box of the NE.

2. Select the CSx card state or switching command as needed.

3. Click the Apply button.

[Result]

In the case that the NE keeps communication with the EMS, click Query and the query results displayed on the dialog box shall be the same as those configured.

Setting Main/Standby NCP Switching [Purpose]

ZXMP S385 NE is equipped with two NCP cards for the 1+1 protection of NCP card. The ZXONM E300 provides the function of switching between

Page 247: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 231

the main NCP and standby NCP, as well as query of the card working status.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S385 that is online and is communicating with the EMS normally.

[Steps]

1. Issue the switching command

i. Select a ZXMP S385 NE in the client operation window. Click the Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> NCP MasterSlaveBrd Switch menu item to enter the NCP MasterSlaveBrd Switch dialog box.

ii. Select the Switch Type and Switch Card.

iii. Click the Apply button.

2. Query the current working NCP card

i. Select the ZXMP S385 NE in the client operation window. Click the Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> NCP MasterSlaveBrd Switch menu item to enter the NCP MasterSlaveBrd Switch dialog box.

ii. Click the Update button.

[Result]

The query result shown in the MasterSlaveBrd Switch dialog box should be same with the settings.

Orienting OW Error [Purpose]

Check if the OW board is running normally by testing the signaling. Two testing modes are supported:

Mode 1: E1, E2 and the protection byte are all F0

Mode 2: E1, E2 and the protection byte are all 0F

Only when the NE is online and the communication with EMS is normally, the operation is valid.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S325 configured with OW board;

ZXMP S360 configured with OHP board

ZXMP S320 configured with OW board

Page 248: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

232 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select an NE except ZXMP S100, and click the menu item Maintenance -> Test -> OW Error Auto Orientation to pop up OW Error Orientation dialog box.

2. Click an NE to be tested in the NE OW State list box.

3. Select the test signaling.

4. Click Test button to send the testing command, then state icon before the selected NE turns into yellow, which means non report. After testing, the state icon of the NE and the State align show the testing result.

5. Click Reset button to cancel the testing signaling and reset the tested NE as well.

6. Click Close button to exit the OW Error Orientation dialog box and return to the client operation window.

Note: After testing, the testing signalling should be cancelled by clicking Reset button timely in order to avoid the interruption of service.

[Result]

After testing, the state icon of the NE and the State align show the testing result. If the state displayed is wrong, click the NE, the wrong board and port No. should be shown in the Result list box.

Testing Communication [Purpose]

Test the communication status between an NE card and the EMS.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs except ZXMP S310

The communication test is applicable only to online NEs in normal communication with the EMS.

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Test -> Communication Test to access the Communication Test dialog box.

2. Select a card and module No. for the test.

3. Click the Apply button.

Page 249: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 233

[Result]

For normal communication, the success information is displayed in Test Result. For communication failure, the EMS displays an alert box indicating the reason.

Ethernet Maintenance This section only introduces some maintenance operations common used.

Querying VLAN Bridge Running State [Purpose]

The running status of the VLAN bridge can be queried when a card serves as a virtual bridge.

[Applicable NEs]

The SDH NEs equipped with SFE/SGE/SE card or RSEB card, which are online and are communicating with the EMS normally. The cards supporting this operation include Ethernet, RSEB and SE card.

[Steps]

1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Query VLAN Bridge Running State to access the Query VLAN Bridge Running State dialog box.

2. Select a card serving as the bridge in the CardName drop-down list box.

3. Click the Query button. And then the running status of the bridge is displayed in the dialog box.

[Result]

The query result will be displayed in the Query VLAN Bridge Running State dialog box.

Querying Running State of Physical Port [Purpose]

Query the running state of ports on SGE/SFE series Ethernet/RSEA cards.

[Applicable NEs]

The SDH NEs equipped with SFE/SGE card or RSEA card, which are online and are communicating with the EMS normally

Page 250: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

234 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

[Steps]

1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Data Card Ports Running State to access the Data Card Ports Running State dialog box.

2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.

3. Click the Query button. And then the running state of the ports on the Ethernet card is displayed in the dialog box.

[Result]

The running state of the Ethernet board will be displayed in the Data Card Ports Running State dialog box.

Querying Multicast State [Purpose]

Query multicast state of a Ethernet card.

[Applicable NEs]

The SDH NEs equipped with SFE/SGE/SE card or RSEA/RSEB card, which are online and are communicating with the EMS normally

[Steps]

1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Query Broad State to access the Query BroadStat dialog box.

2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.

3. Click the Query button. And then the multicast state of the Ethernet card is displayed in the dialog box.

[Result]

The multicast state will be displayed in the Query BroadStat dialog box.

Querying LCAS Running State of Virtual Concatenation [Purpose]

Query the LCAS running status of virtual concatenation

In the case that system ports of cards are in virtual concatenation mode, which adopts the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS), the LCAS running state of each timeslot of the system port can be queried.

Page 251: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 235

[Applicable NEs]

The SDH NEs equipped with SFE/SGE/SE card, RSEB card, or TGEB card (with the software/hardware version of 0320); which are online and are communicating with the EMS normally

[Steps]

1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> LCAS Running State of Virtual Concat to access the LCAS Running State of Virtual Concat dialog box.

2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.

3. Click the Query button. And then the LCAS state of the Ethernet card will be displayed in the dialog box.

[Result]

The LCAS state of Ethernet board will be displayed in the LCAS Running State of Virtual Concat dialog box.

Querying RPR Ring Topology [Purpose]

Query the RPR topology.

[Applicable NEs]

Online NEs configured with RSEB-EOS and RSEB-RPR board, which is communicated with EMS normally.

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Query RPR Net Topo to pop up Query RPR Net Topo dialog box.

2. Select the board and port to be queried.

3. Click Query button.

[Result]

The configured RPR topology should be displayed in the PRP top dialog box.

Querying RPR Ring Topology State [Purpose]

Query the topology state of RPR ring

Page 252: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

236 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The topology state of RPR ring includes the addresses of other sites on the ring, whether the RPR external ring and internal ring are reachable for other sites, and the hops to other sites.

[Applicable NEs]

Node NEs on RPR rings, i.e. ZXMP S380/ZXMP S390 equipment equipped with RSEA card or ZXMP S330 equipped with RSEB card in non-pass-through state. The NEs must be online and in normal communication with the EMS.

[Steps]

1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> RPR Ring Topology State to access the RPR Ring Topo State dialog box.

2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.

3. Click the Query button. And then the state of the ring where the RSEA/RSEB card is located is displayed in the dialog box.

[Result]

The RPR ring state where RSEA board or RSEB board lies in will be displayed in the RPR Ring Topo State dialog box.

Querying RPR Physical Port Running State [Purpose]

Query the running state of RPR physical ports.

The RPR physical ports include the user ports, system RPR ports and system SPAN ports of RSEA card.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S380 or ZXMP S390 NEs equipped with RSEA card, which are online and are communicating with the EMS normally

[Steps]

1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> RPR Port Run State to access the RPR Port Run State dialog box.

2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.

3. Click the Query button. And then the running state of alls ports on the RSEA card is displayed in the dialog box.

[Result]

The running state of all ports on RSEA board will be displayed in the RPR Port Run State dialog box.

Page 253: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 237

Querying MSTP Universal [Purpose]

Query the MSTP information.

The query contents include port information, STP attributes, STP port attributes, card attributes, VLAN information, transparent transmission information, ingress rate, MAC address table, LCAS state, version information, VCG port information, and VCG TS information.

[Applicable NEs]

SDH NEs equipped with SE card or RSEB card, which are online and are communicating with the EMS normally

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Universal query of MSTP to access the Universal query of MSTP dialog box.

2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.

3. Click the Query button. And then the running state of the RSEB/SE card is displayed in this dialog box.

[Result]

The running state of RSEB board or SE board will be displayed in the Universal query of MSTP dialog box.

Setting Port Mirroring [Purpose]

Use an idle port (mirror port) to mirror a port with traffic (mirrored port) so as to obtain data packets of the port. Combining with the network packet capture tool, the contents in traffic data frames carried by the mirrored port can be analyzed so as to locate possible faults.

Mirroring mode

Send: The mirror port obtains a transmitted data packet of the mirrored port.

Receive: The mirror port obtains a received date packet of the mirrored port.

Mirror cards and ports

Page 254: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

238 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

T AB L E 90 C AR D S AN D P O R T S S U P P O R T I N G P O R T M I R R O R

NE Type Card Type Port Type

ZXMP S320 and ZXMP S360

SFE/SGE System port and user port

SFE/SGE System port and user port

RSEA User port

RSEB User port and VCG (EOS) port

ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390

SE User port and VCG (EOS) port

SFE System port and user port ZXMP S330

RSEB User port and VCG (EOS) port

ZXMP S325 SFE System port and user port

SFE/SGE System port and user port

SE User port and VCG (EOS) port ZXMP S385

RSEB User port and VCG (EOS) port

ZXMP S200 SE User port and internal Ethernet port

[Applicable NEs]

SDH NEs equipped with SFE/SGE/SE card or RSEA/RSEB card, which are online and are communicating with the EMS normally

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Port Mirror to access the Port Mirror dialog box.

2. Select the card, mirror type, mirror port and mirrored port.

3. Click Add to add a mirror record to the mirror list.

4. Click the Apply button.

[Result]

The contents in service data frames carried by the mirrored port are available for analysis combining with the network packet capture tool.

Setting Data Board Ping Function [Purpose]

Check if the communication between the data board and the destination is normal by pinging the destination IP address from data board.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S200 and ZXMP S385 equipped with SE, RSEB, RSEB-EOS and TFE board. The NEs is online and communicates with EMS normally.

Page 255: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 239

[Steps]

1. Start the Ping function of data board

i. In the client operation window, double click an NE to open Card Management dialog box.

ii. Right-click the data board to set the Ping function, and then select Property in the shortcut menu to go to the Card Property dialog box.

iii. In the Card Property dialog box, click Advanced.. button to go to the Advanced.. dialog box.

iv. Click Data Card Property tab to go to the Data Card Property page.

v. Input IP address of the board in the IP Address spin box. And select Enable in Ping Enable drop-down list box.

vi. Click OK button to make the settings valid.

2. In the client operation window, select the data board which has started the Ping function, and click Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> DtBoard Ping menu item to go to DtBoard Ping dialog box.

3. Select the data board which has started the Ping function, input VLAN ID, Bag Length, and Wait Timeout.

4. Input destination IP or select he destination IP from All Data Board area.

5. Click Start PING button.

[Result]

In the Ping function dialog box, the Ping result and statistic information are displayed.

Querying Card Version [Purpose]

Query PCB version, software version, and FPGA version of all the cards in the selected NEs.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs except ZXMP S360 that are online and are communicating with the EMS normally

[Steps]

1. Select an applicable NE in the client operation window. Click the Maintenance -> Query Board Version menu item to enter the Query all boards version dialog box, as shown in Figure 129. The NE to be

Page 256: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

240 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

queried list in the NE List list box lists all the NEs that support query of card version.

F I G U R E 129 QU E R Y AL L B O AR D S V E R S I O N D I AL O G B O X

2. If it is necessary to select other NEs, click the Condition button to enter the Query all boards version filter dialog box, where other NEs can be selected. Click the Apply button and then the Close button to return to the Query all boards version dialog box.

3. Click the Query button.

[Result]

If the query succeeded, the Query all boards version result dialog box shown in Figure 130 will pop up. For cards that support card version query, the dialog box displays the PCB version, software version, FPGA version, and quantity of the cards; for cards that do not support card version query, the dialog box only displays the card slot information.

Page 257: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 241

F I G U R E 130 QU E R Y AL L B O AR D S V E R S I O N R E S U L T D I AL O G B O X

Setting Time Management [Purpose]

Query the NCP time of an NE and verify it as per the EMS time; and check if the NE can communicate with the EMS normally

Through the time management command, check the channel between an NE and the EMS, and query the NCP time of the NE. Thus correct the NCP time based on the background time of the EMS.

[Applicable NEs]

SDH NEs that are online and are communicating with the EMS normally

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Time Management to access the Time Management dialog box.

2. Click the Query button to display the NCP time of the selected NE.

3. Click the Verify Time button to verify the NCP time of the selected NE; while click the Verify All NE button to verify the NCP time of all NEs managed by the Manager.

Page 258: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

242 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

[Result]

If the NCP card succeeded to report the NCP time, the Time Management dialog box displays NCP Time and NMS Time of the selected NE, as shown in Figure 131.

F I G U R E 131 T I M E M AN AG E M E N T D I AL O G B O X

If the NCP card failed to report the NCP time, a prompt box will pop up indicating the failure reason, and the NCP time in the Time Management dialog box will be displayed as “---”.

Configuring NE Synchronous Time [Purpose]

Configure synchronous mode and time interval of NE. If NTP is adopted, NTP server must be set as well.

The synchronous mode includes:

No Sync: the time of NE is not synchronous with that of EMS server or NTP server.

Auto Sync: the time of NE is synchronous with that of EMS server. If not, correct the time of NE according to that of EMS service.

NTP Sync: the time of NE is synchronous with that of NTP server. If not, correct the time of NE according to that of NTP service.

Page 259: SDH Configuration

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 243

[Applicable NEs]

All SDH NEs, which are online and communicate with EMS normally

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click Maintenance-> Ne Sync Time Config menu item to go to Ne Sync Time Config dialog box. Set SyncMode is the defaulted page.

2. Input Time Interval and then select SyncMode.

3. Click Apply button to make the settings valid.

4. If NTP Sync is adopted, click Set NTP Server tab to go to Set NTP Server page.

i. Click Add.. button to pop up Set NEW NTP Server dialog box.

ii. Input the IP address of the new NTP server and select the priority.

iii. Click Apply button to make the settings valid and return to the Ne Sync Time Config dialog box.

iv. Select if to lock the NTP server based on the requirement.

v. Click Apply button to make the settings of NTP server valid.

vi. Click Close button to exit the Ne Sync Time Config dialog box.

Note: An NE can set 5 NTP servers at most. NE can select NTP server automatically according to NTP server’s priority. Once the NTP server with high priority can not be used, the NE would select another NTP server with the priority next to the high one.

If the NTP server is locked, the NE synchronize with the locked NTP server.

[Result]

If the setting is successful, the display area in the Ne Sync Time Config dialog box will display the result. If not, the display area displays the failure reason.

Page 260: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

244 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 261: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 245

PART C

System Operations

PART C consists of only one chapter: Chapter 9 System Management, which describes the system management operations including:

Security management: querying the NCP security log of SDH NEs.

NCP data management: managing NCP data of SDH NEs, including database download/upload, upload comparison and automatic upload comparison.

Report management: get statistics on the configuration, alarm and performance information of the selected NE in the form of reports. It facilitates the printing or saving operations. The reports are divided into the configuration report, current alarm/performance report, and history alarm/performance report.

Page 262: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

246 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 263: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 247

C h a p t e r 9

System Management

This chapter describes the operation of NCP security management, NCP data management, and report management.

Note: This chapter only describes the system management functions related to NE. For management of EMS database and EMS system, refer to the Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.18) EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Operation Manual (Volume I) Basic Operations for details.

Querying NCP Security Log [Purpose]

The query of NCP security log queries the latest modified log of NCP data, which covers the operation name, operator, and the operation time.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S325, and ZXMP S200 NEs which are online

[Steps]

Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item Security -> NCP Security Log to access the NCP Security Log dialog box. Then the querying result will be displayed in the dialog box, including the DB file name, manager OID (manager ID) and operation time.

[Result]

The NCP security log including file name, manager OID and operation time will be displayed in the NCP Security Log dialog box.

Page 264: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

248 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Note: NCP data management is available only for online NEs in normal communication with the EMS.

NCP Data Management Downloading Database [Purpose]

After configuration and maintenance operations in the ZXONM E300, the corresponding data should be downloaded to the NCP card of the selected NE, which will forward corresponding data to relevant cards for configuration.

[Applicable NEs]

All the online SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select the NE in the client operation window, and click the menu item System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Download to enter the Download DB dialog box.

2. Select the type of database to be downloaded in the Download DB list.

3. Click the Apply button to start the download process.

[Result]

After the download completes, select the NE whose data is downloaded, and then select the menu item System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Upload and Compare menu to pop up the Compare dialog box.

Select DB files to be compared in the Upload DB list box, and click the Compare button to start comparing the original downloaded data and upload data. The data uploaded from the NE database should be completely consistent with the data saved in the EMS database.

Uploading Database [Purpose]

The configuration data in the NCP card of the NE can be uploaded and saved to the EMS database, overwriting the original data of this NE in it.

[Applicable NEs]

All the online SDH NEs

Page 265: SDH Configuration

Chapter 9 - System Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 249

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Upload and Save menu to access the Upload DB dialog box.

2. Select the DB files to be uploaded in the Upload DB list.

3. Click the Upload button.

[Result]

After the upload completes, select the NE whose data is uploaded, and then select the menu item System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Upload and Compare menu to pop up the Compare dialog box.

Select DB files to be compared in the Upload DB list box, and click the Compare button to start comparing the original downloaded data and upload data. The data uploaded from the NE database should be completely consistent with the data saved in the EMS database.

Uploading and Comparing Database [Purpose]

Upload and compare the NE data information of an on-line NE

The data in the NCP of the selected NE can be uploaded to the EMS and compared with the data of the same type stored in the EMS database through this operation. If some data is different, they can be downloaded or uploaded to achieve the consistency.

[Applicable NEs]

All the online SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an on-line NE in the client operation window, and then select the System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Upload and Compare menu to access the Compare dialog box.

2. Select the item “NE Information” in the Upload DB list box.

3. Click the Compare button.

[Result]

After the comparison completes, the Upload and Compare dialog box pops up to display the comparison result between the selected data at the NE side and that at the EMS side, as shown in Figure 132.

Page 266: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

250 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

F I G U R E 132 U P L O AD AN D C O M P AR E D I A L O G B O X

Setting Board Upload and Compare [Purpose]

Upload the timeslot of sub network protection to EMS Manager and compare with the same type data saved in the EMS Manager.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S320 online NEs, which are communicate with EMS normally

[Steps]

1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item System -> NCP Data Management -> Board Upload and Compare to go to Board Upload and Compare dialog box.

2. Select TimeSlot check box, “√” indicates the item has been selected.

3. Click Compare button.

[Result]

Once the command is executed successfully, the compare and upload dialog box will display the comparison between the data of the selected board and that of EMS Manager.

Page 267: SDH Configuration

Chapter 9 - System Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 251

Uploading and Comparing Database Automatically [Purpose]

Set the upload start time, cycle, NE type and data type to for automatic data uploading & comparing.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item System -> NCP Data Management -> Auto Upload and Compare menu to access the Autoed Upload And Compare dialog box.

2. Enter the start time and period for automatic uploading and comparing.

3. In the Setting NE list box, select the NEs to be uploaded and compared.

4. In the Data Item list box, select the type of data to be uploaded. The symbol before the item indicates it has been selected.

5. Click Add to add the automatic upload and comparison record in the Config Info list box, as shown in Figure 133.

6. Click Apply button to confirm the operation.

F I G U R E 133 AU T O E D U P L O AD AN D C O M P AR E D I AL O G B O X

Page 268: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

252 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

[Result]

Select the configured NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item System -> Log Management. Then you may find the upload log of the NE in the Auto Comparing Log page of the Log Administration dialog box.

Synchronizing NE Data into DB [Purpose]

When ZXONM E300 uses the NCP database to synchronize data of itself, the data synchronization of NE can be enabled or disabled if the configuration data of the EMS is inconsistent with that of the SDH NE

There are three synchronization modes:

Stop: NEs are not involved in data synchronization.

Autoed upload and compare: When the configuration data of the EMS and the actual NE are inconsistent, the system may pop up the prompt box for users to save it manually according to actual situation.

Autoed synchronization NE data: When the configuration data of the EMS and the actual NE are inconsistent, the system will automatically upload the inconsistent data.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and then select the System -> NCP Data Management -> Synchronous NE Data into DB menu to access the Synchronous NE Data Configuration dialog box.

2. Select the data synchronization mode of the NE.

3. Click the Apply button.

[Result]

For the inconsistent NE data, the relevant operations will be performed according to the NE synchronization setting.

Clearing NCP Database [Purpose]

The data saved in the NCP database can be cleared, while the IP address will be kept for being supervised by the EMS. The NCP card will be reset automatically and form a basic database. This operation is only applicable to ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390 and ZXMP 385 which is online and in normal communication with the EMS.

Page 269: SDH Configuration

Chapter 9 - System Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 253

Danger: The reset of the card will result in traffic interruption after the NCP database is cleared.

[Applicable NEs]

ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390 and ZXMP S200 online NEs which communicate with the EMS normally

[Steps]

1. Select an applicable NE in the client operation window, and then select the System -> NCP Data Management -> Clear NCP DB menu item, the prompt box will pop up for confirmation.

2. Click the Yes button to delete the NCP database. And a prompt box will pop up to display the operation result.

[Result]

A prompt box should pop up to prompt the operation result.

Report Management ZXONM E300 support the report management function when the reporter server is started. With this function, the user can make statistics on the configuration, alarm and performance information of the currently selected NE in the form of reports, facilitating the printing and restoring of these information.

Note:

In the Unix operating system, the report server and the client GUI start up at the same time.

In the Windows operating system, they start up separately. When the report

server starts, the icon should be displayed at the taskbar on the ZXONM E300 client computer screen. Users may select Start > Program > ZXONM E300 > Report Server to start the report server.

Configuring Report [Purpose]

Preview, print and save the card report. Reports of multiple NEs can be queried at the same time.

[Applicable NEs]

Page 270: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

254 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

All the SDH NEs

Take NE A and NE D in the networking instance provided in Chapter 1 as example.

Checkpoint: Make sure that the Reprot Server has been started before the report operations.

[Steps]

1. Select NE A and NE D in the client operation window, and then select the Report -> Config Report menu to pop up the Config Report dialog box.

2. In the Config Report Type list, click the item “Card Report”.

3. Click the Preview button to view the card report in the pop-up Unitrans Report window, as shown in Figure 134.

4. Click the Print button to print the card report.

5. Click the Save As button to save the card report as a file of xls, rtf, txt, pdf, or html format.

F I G U R E 134 U N I T R AN S R E P O R T W I N D O W

Configuring Current Alarm PSE Report [Purpose]

Preview, print and save the current alarm PSE report of an NE.

The current alarm PSE report is classified into three kinds of reports, as listed in Table 91. The system can form the report according to one or more conditions being set.

Page 271: SDH Configuration

Chapter 9 - System Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 255

The operations of previewing, printing and saving the reports are only applicable to online NEs in normal communication with the EMS.

T AB L E 91 C U R R E N T AL AR M PSE R E P O R T L I S T

Report Type Optional Condition

Current Alarm NE, alarm reason, acknowledgement information, alarm severity and alarm type. Multiple items can be selected in each condition.

Current Over Threshold Alarm NE, performance item and acknowledgement information. Multiple items can be selected in each condition.

Current Protection Switch Event (PSE)

NE and protection mode ((MSP, SNCP, card switch and RPR switch, ATM switch and LSP switch). Only NE list box supports multiple choices.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Report -> Current Alarm PSE Report menu to enter the Current Alarm PSE Report dialog box.

2. Execute the following operations to enter the corresponding pages.

Click the Current Alarm tab to enter the Current Alarm page.

Click the Current Over Threshold Alarm tab to enter the Current Over Threshold Alarm page.

Click the Current Protection Switch Event tab to enter the Current Protection Switch Event page, and set conditions in the corresponding pages.

3. Click Preview to view the report in the Unitrans Report window.

4. Click Print to print the alarm report.

5. Click the Save As button to save the alarm report as a file.

[Result]

The reports of Current alarm, current over threshold alarm and current protection switch event can be previewed, printed and saved.

Configuring History Alarm Performance PSE Report [Purpose]

Preview, print and save the history alarm performance PSE report of an NE.

Page 272: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

256 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The history alarm performance PSE report is divided into four kinds of reports, as listed in Table 92. The system can form the report according to one or more conditions being set. The operations of previewing, printing and saving the reports are only applicable to online NEs in normal communication with the EMS.

T AB L E 92 R E P O R T S O F H I S T O R Y AL AR M P E R F O R M AN C E PSE

Report Type Optional Condition

History Alarm

NE, alarm reason, acknowledgement information, alarm severity alarm type and alarm reason. All these parameters support multiple choices.

Supports the month report, quarter report or report in any time period.

History Over Threshold Alarm

NE, performance item, acknowledgement information, time and backinfo. All these parameters support multiple choices.

Supports the month report, quarter report or report in any time period.

History Protection Switch Event

NE and protection mode ((MSP, SNCP, card switch, RPR switch, RPR switch, Clock Source PSE, ATM PSE and LSP PSE). Only NE supports multiple choices.

Supports the month report, quarter report or report in any time period.

History Performance

NE, performance Item, granularity cycle, time and backinfo. NE and performance support multiple choices.

Supports the month report, quarter report or report in any time period.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Report -> History Alarm Performance PSE Report menu to enter the History Alarm Performance PSE Report dialog box.

2. Execute the following operations to enter the corresponding pages.

Click the History Alarm tab to enter the History Alarm page.

Click the History Over Threshold Alarm tab to enter the History Over Threshold Alarm page.

Click the History protection switch event tab to enter the History Protection Switch Event page.

Click the History Performance tab to enter the History Performance page.

3. Set conditions in the corresponding pages.

Page 273: SDH Configuration

Chapter 9 - System Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 257

4. Click Preview to view the report in the Unitrans Report window

5. Click Print to print corresponding report.

6. Click Save As to save the alarm report as a file of xls, rtf, txt, pdf, or html format.

[Result]

The reports of history alarm, history over threshold alarm, history performance and history protection switch event can be previewed, printed and saved.

Configuring Net Path Report [Purpose]

The MS links, RS links and circuit services of the selected NE in the entire network can be queried. And the query results can be displayed in topology or list, which can be previewed and printed in the Net Path Report window. The functions of the net path report are listed in Table 93.

T AB L E 93 N E T P AT H R E P O R T S

Report Type Description Function

Terminal Service

Termination circuit of the selected NE

The topology displays the routes of the selected circuit in the list.

The list displays terminal NEs, card, ports, direction and speed of the termination circuit.

Merge the displayed circuits and display the DDF and time slot information

Filter and query the valid circuit on the basis of the current querying result.

Non-terminal Service

Non-Termination circuit of the selected NE

The topology displays the routes of the selected circuit in the list.

The list displays alarm state, terminal NEs, card, ports, direction, speed, user label and name of the non-termination circuit which can be merged as circuit, service alarm, performance and timeslot.

Filter and query the valid circuit on the basis of the current querying result.

Exception Circuit

Mismatched speed, incorrect concatenation, wrong service with abnormal multiplexing mode

The topology displays the routes of the selected path in the list

The list displays terminal NEs, card, ports, direction, speed and name of the non-termination circuit.

Exception RS Link

Unidirectional optical links in the

The list displays the source NE, destination NE, source card, destination card, source port,

Page 274: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

258 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Report Type Description Function

entire network destination port, source direction and destination direction for the unidirectional optical connection of the selected NE.

[Applicable NEs]

All the SDH NEs

[Steps]

1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu item Report -> Net Path Report to access the Net Path Ne Select Dialog select box, as shown in Figure 135.

F I G U R E 135 N E T P AT H N E S E L E C T D I AL O G B O X

2. More NEs can be selected and added into the Selected NE list box;

3. Click OK to enter the Net Path Report dialog box.

4. Execute the following operations to enter the corresponding pages.

Click the Terminal Service tab to enter the Terminal Service page, as shown in Figure 136.

Click the Non-terminal Service tab to enter the Non-terminal Service page.

Click the Exception Circuit tab to enter the Exception Circuit page.

Page 275: SDH Configuration

Chapter 9 - System Management

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 259

Click the Exception RSLink tab to enter the Exception RSLink page.

F I G U R E 136 N E T P AT H R E P O R T D I AL O G B O X (E X C E P T I O N RSL I N K P AG E )

[Result]

Check if the MS link and RS link of the entire network and the circuit service of the selected NE are correctly displayed. Click Print to display the query result in a table.

Page 276: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

260 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 277: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 261

Abbreviations

Abbreviations Full Name

A

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AF Assured Forwarding

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

ANSI American National Standards Institute

APR Automatic Power Reduce

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

AU-n Administrative Unit, level n

AUG Administrative Unit Group

B

BE Best Effort

C

C-n Container-n

CIR Committed Information Rate

COS Class Of Service

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CSF Client Signal Failure

D

DCC Data Communications Channel

DCN Data Communications Network

DXC Digital Cross-Connect

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EF Expedited Forwarding

EIR Excessive Information Rate

EOS Ethernet Over SDH

EPL Ethernet Private Line

ES Error Second

Page 278: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

262 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Abbreviations Full Name

ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

F

FE Fast Ethernet

FEBBE Far End Background Block Error

FEES Far End Errored Second

FESES Far End Severely Errored Second

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GUI Graphical User Interface

GFP Generic Framing Procedures

H

HDLC High Digital Link Control

I

IP Internet Protocol

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union -Telecommunication Standardization Sector

L

LAN Local Area Network

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT Local Craft Terminal

LFD Loss of Frame Delineation

LOF Loss Of Frame

LOM Loss Of Multiframe

LOP Loss Of Pointer

LOS Loss Of Signal

LSP Label Switched Path

LST Link Status Transport

M

MCU Micro-Control Unit

MS Multiplex Section

MS-AIS Multiplex Section - Alarm Indication Signal

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MS-SPRing Multiplexer Section Shared Protection Ring

MST Multiplex Section Terminal

MSTP Multi-service Transport Platform

Page 279: SDH Configuration

Abbreviations

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 263

Abbreviations Full Name

N

NE Network Element

NTP Network Time Protocol

P

PCM Pulse Code Modulation

PIR Peak Information Rate

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

POH Path OverHead

PSE Protection Switching Event

PTR Pointer

PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit

PW Pseudo Wire

Q

QoS Quality of Service

R

RPR Resilient Packet Ring

RS Regenerator Section

RSOH Regenerator Section OverHead

S

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SEC SDH Equipment Clock

SES Severely Errored Second

SESR Severely Errored Second Ratio

SNC Sub-Network Connection

SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection

SPRING Shared Protection Ring

SSM Synchronization Status Message

STM-N Synchronous Transport Module, level N (N=1, 4, 16, 64)

T

TS Time Slot

TU-m Tributary Unit, level m

TUG-m Tributary Unit Group, level m

U

UAS Unavailable Second

UBR Unspecified Bit Rate

UNEQ Unequipped

UNI User Network Interface

Page 280: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

264 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Abbreviations Full Name

V

VC Virtual Channel

VC Virtual Container

VC-n Virtual Container, level n

VCG Virtual Container Group

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VP Virtual Path

W

WAN Wide Area Network

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WTR Wait to Restore time

Page 281: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 265

Figures

Figure 1 Networking Diagram....................................................................... 5 Figure 2 Create NE Dialog Box (for NE A)....................................................... 9 Figure 3 Client Operation Window with NE A Created......................................10 Figure 4 Card Management Dialog Box .........................................................11 Figure 5 Simulative Rack of NE A.................................................................12 Figure 6 Simulative Rack of NE B.................................................................12 Figure 7 Simulative Rack of NE C.................................................................13 Figure 8 Simulative Rack of NE D ................................................................13 Figure 9 Simulative Rack of NE E.................................................................14 Figure 10 Simulative Rack of NE F ...............................................................14 Figure 11 Link Management Dialog Box (without Optical Links) ........................15 Figure 12 Topology with Optical Links ..........................................................16 Figure 13 Link Dialog Box (with Established Optical Links)...............................17 Figure 14 MS Protection Config Dialog Box....................................................18 Figure 15 MS Group Config Dialog Box .........................................................18 Figure 16 MS Protection Config Dialog Box....................................................19 Figure 17 MS Protection Config Dialog Box (with NEs added) ...........................20 Figure 18 APS ID Config Dialog Box .............................................................20 Figure 19 APS Operation Dialog Box.............................................................21 Figure 20 Service Config Dialog Box of NE A..................................................22 Figure 21 Service Config Dialog Box of NE E..................................................24 Figure 22 Clock Source Config Dialog Box .....................................................28 Figure 23 Clock Config Dialog Box ...............................................................29 Figure 24 Compatible Page of the Clock Source Dialog Box..............................30 Figure 25 OW Auto-set Dialog Box...............................................................31 Figure 26 Auto Create OW Number Dialog Box ..............................................31 Figure 27 Select OW Protection Byte Dialog Box ............................................32 Figure 28 OW Configuration Dialog Box (Query Result) ...................................32 Figure 29 Select OW Protection Byte Dialog Box (Verifying).............................33 Figure 30 Download DB Dialog Box ..............................................................34 Figure 31 Create the Service Layer Circuit ....................................................38 Figure 32 Create the PDH Circuit .................................................................39 Figure 33 Create Trunk Circuit .....................................................................40 Figure 34 Add Tributaries ...........................................................................41 Figure 35 Create Concatenation Circuit.........................................................42 Figure 36 Create Data Service Circuit...........................................................43 Figure 37 Create Circuit-Speed, Direction, Priority Dialog Box..........................44 Figure 38 Create circuit-node information Dialog Box .....................................45 Figure 39 Create circuit-affirm Dialog Box.....................................................45 Figure 40 Create circuit-node information Dialog Box .....................................46 Figure 41 Select AZ End Termination Dialog Box............................................46 Figure 42 TGEB Installation Interface ...........................................................52 Figure 43 User Port Configuration Flowchart of SFE/SGE Board ........................61 Figure 44 System Port Configuration Flowchart of SFE/SGE Board ....................63 Figure 45 VLAN/STP Configuration Flowchart of SFE/SGE Board .......................67 Figure 46 Configuration Flowchart of SE Board User Ports ...............................72 Figure 47 Configuration Flowchart of SE Board VCG (EOS) Ports ......................73 Figure 48 VLAN Mark Configuration Flowchart of SE Board ..............................75 Figure 49 Configuration Flowchart of VCG (EOS) Ports on SE Board ..................81 Figure 50 VLAN/STP Configuration Flowchart of SE Board................................83

Page 282: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

266 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Figure 51 User Port Configuration Flowchart of RSEA Board.............................87 Figure 52 System Port Configuration Flowchart of RSEA Board.........................90 Figure 53 User Isolation Configuration Flowchart of RSEA Board.......................92 Figure 54 Configuration Flowchart of User Ports...........................................104 Figure 55 Flowchart of Configuring VCG (GFP MPLS) Port Capacity and VCG (EOS)

port Capacity (MSE Board))................................................................108 Figure 56 Workflow of Establishing the LSP (MSE Board)...............................111 Figure 57 VFI Config Dialog Box (EVPL Service) (1)......................................115 Figure 58 VFI Config Dialog Box (EVPL Service) (2)......................................116 Figure 59 VSI Configuration (EVPLA Service) (1)..........................................119 Figure 60 VSI Configuration (EVPLA Service) (2)..........................................119 Figure 61 VSI Configuration (EVPLA Service) (3)..........................................120 Figure 62 New Emul Port Dialog Box ..........................................................121 Figure 63 VSI Configuration (Add VALN for Emulation Ethernet Port) (1) .........122 Figure 64 VSI Configuration (Add VALN for Emulation Ethernet Port) (2) .........122 Figure 65 ZXMP S320 Point-to-Point Networking..........................................124 Figure 66 Card Management Dialog Box of NE K ..........................................125 Figure 67 Card Management Dialog Box of NE L...........................................125 Figure 68 Advanced Dialog Box of SFE4 Card ..............................................126 Figure 69 Path Group Config Page .............................................................127 Figure 70 Set Port Capacity Page...............................................................128 Figure 71 LCAS Config Page of NE L...........................................................129 Figure 72 Data Card Property Page of NE K.................................................130 Figure 73 Data Card VLAN Config Dialog Box...............................................131 Figure 74 Networking Example for ATM Service ...........................................138 Figure 75 ATM Service Relationship ...........................................................138 Figure 76 Card Management Dialog Box of NE M..........................................139 Figure 77 Card Management Dialog Box of NE N ..........................................140 Figure 78 Card Port Configuration..............................................................141 Figure 79 PVC Configuration Dialog Box......................................................142 Figure 80 PVC Connection Configuration .....................................................143 Figure 81 Service Config Dialog Box...........................................................143 Figure 82 MS Property Config Dialog Box ....................................................146 Figure 83 Set Squelch Mode Dialog Box......................................................146 Figure 84 MS protection Dialog Box ...........................................................149 Figure 85 DCC Use Set Dialog Box..............................................................151 Figure 86 DCN Networking Example...........................................................152 Figure 87 NE Static Route Configuration Dialog Box (NE5).............................153 Figure 88 NE Static Route Configuration Dialog Box (NE9).............................154 Figure 89 DCN Network (1) ......................................................................155 Figure 90 Networking Diagram of Capacity Expansion Without Multiplex Section

Protection........................................................................................157 Figure 91 Save Expansion Configuration in EMS Database .............................158 Figure 92 Expansion of MS Protection Ring Network .....................................159 Figure 93 Save Expansion Configuration in EMS Database .............................160 Figure 94 Expansion of MS Protection Link Network......................................161 Figure 95 MS Chain Page of Expand-Modify MS Group Dialog Box...................162 Figure 96 Save Expansion Configuration to EMS Database.............................162 Figure 97 Circuit Query Dialog Box ............................................................164 Figure 98 Query BC Circuit Grp Dialog Box..................................................165 Figure 99 Search SDH Ne and Link Dialog Box (Search All)............................167 Figure 100 Ack Searched Ne Dialog Box .....................................................168 Figure 101 Search SDH Ne and Link Dialog Box (Search From Ne)..................169 Figure 102 Alarm Mask Dialog Box.............................................................174 Figure 103 Alarm Severity Dialog Box ........................................................175 Figure 104 Alarm Standby Dialog Box ........................................................177 Figure 105 Alarm Audible Set Dialog Box ....................................................178 Figure 106 Alarm Prompt Setting Dialog Box ...............................................180 Figure 107 Alarm Filter Setting Dialog Box (AlarmReport Filter Page)..............181 Figure 108 Agent External Alarm Setting Dialog Box.....................................182 Figure 109 Alarm Diagnose Config Dialog Box .............................................184

Page 283: SDH Configuration

Figures

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 267

Figure 110 Client Operation Window (Current Alarm Sub-Page) .....................187 Figure 111 Querying Alarms Through Status Board (1) .................................187 Figure 112 Querying Alarms Through Status Board (2) .................................188 Figure 113 Alarm Statistic Dialog Box.........................................................189 Figure 114 Current Alarm Management Dialog Box (AllAlarm Page) ................190 Figure 115 History Alarm Statistic Dialog Box..............................................191 Figure 116 History Alarm Dialog Box..........................................................192 Figure 117 Alarm Statistic Dialog Box (Locked Alarm)...................................194 Figure 118 Result Dialog Box (Circuit Alarm Analysis)...................................197 Figure 119 Performance Threshold Dialog Box .............................................200 Figure 120 Performance Register Reset Dialog Box.......................................202 Figure 121 Zero-Performance Restrain Dialog Box........................................203 Figure 122 Performance Mask Dialog Box ...................................................204 Figure 123 SNC Switch Config Dialog Box ...................................................207 Figure 124 Rpr Board Traff AdminPara Setting Dialog Box .............................208 Figure 125 Performance Management Dialog Box (with Query Result).............209 Figure 126 Performance Task Dialog Box ....................................................214 Figure 127 Task Statistic Result Dialog Box..................................................214 Figure 128 Loopback Directions.................................................................220 Figure 129 Query all boards version dialog box............................................240 Figure 130 Query all boards version result Dialog Box ..................................241 Figure 131 Time Management Dialog Box ...................................................242 Figure 132 Upload and Compare Dialog Box................................................250 Figure 133 Autoed upload and compare Dialog Box ......................................251 Figure 134 Unitrans Report Window ...........................................................254 Figure 135 Net Path Ne Select Dialog Box...................................................258 Figure 136 Net Path Report Dialog Box (Exception RSLink page) ....................259

Page 284: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

268 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 285: SDH Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 269

Tables

Table 1 Typographical Conventions ...............................................................iii Table 2 Mouse Operation Conventions...........................................................iii Table 3 Safety Signs...................................................................................iv Table 4 Networking Flow of Online NEs.......................................................... 3 Table 5 Networking Flow of Offline NEs.......................................................... 4 Table 6 Type of Equipment and Service Boards............................................... 6 Table 7 Board Configuration of ZXMP S390 (NE A, B, C, and D) ........................ 6 Table 8 Board Configuration of ZXMP S380 (NE E) .......................................... 6 Table 9 Board Configuration of ZXMP S360 (NE F)........................................... 7 Table 10 Layout of IP Address for Each NE and the EMS Computer .................... 7 Table 11 NE Information ............................................................................. 8 Table 12 Link Configuration ........................................................................15 Table 13 Configuration of Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Group...........................19 Table 14 Configuration of Four-fiber 1+1 MSP Link.........................................22 Table 15 MSP Relationship Configuration ......................................................23 Table 16 Traffic Requirements.....................................................................24 Table 17 Timeslot Configuration of NE A .......................................................25 Table 18 Timeslot Configuration of NE B (1)..................................................25 Table 19 Timeslot Configuration of NE B (2)..................................................25 Table 20 Timeslot Configuration of NE C (1)..................................................25 Table 21 Timeslot Configuration of NE C (2)..................................................26 Table 22 Timeslot Configuration of NE C (3)..................................................26 Table 23 Timeslot Configuration of NE D (1)..................................................26 Table 24 Timeslot Configuration of NE D (2)..................................................26 Table 25 Timeslot Configuration of NE D (3)..................................................27 Table 26 Timeslot Configuration of NE E .......................................................27 Table 27 Timeslot Configuration of NE F .......................................................27 Table 28 Clock Source Configuration ............................................................29 Table 29 Transparent Transmission Ethernet Boards.......................................50 Table 30 Selection Principles of TFE Board ....................................................53 Table 31 Data Property of TFE Board............................................................54 Table 32 Mapping Regulations of System Ports in TFE Board............................55 Table 33 Port Properties of Ethernet Adapter Manager Dialog Box .....................56 Table 34 Settings of VLAN Mark Page of TFE Board ........................................57 Table 35 SFE/SGE Series Boards .................................................................59 Table 36 User Port Configuration Parameters of SFE/SGE Board.......................61 Table 37 System Port Configuration Parameters of SFE/SGE Board...................64 Table 38 Parameters of SFE/SGE Board Property ...........................................65 Table 39 VLAN/STP Configuration Description of SFE/SGE Board ......................68 Table 40 SE Boards ...................................................................................69 Table 41 Parameters of SE Board Property....................................................70 Table 42 Port Property Parameters of SE Board .............................................73 Table 43 Parameters of VLAN Mark Page of SE Board .....................................75 Table 44 Optional Pages in Ethernet adapter manager Dialog Box of SE Board ...77 Table 45 VCG (EOS) Port Capacity Parameters of SE Board .............................81 Table 46 VLAN/STP Configuration Description of SE Board...............................84 Table 47 RPR Series Boards ........................................................................85 Table 48 RPR Ports....................................................................................85 Table 49 User Port Configuration Parameters of RSEA Board............................88

Page 286: SDH Configuration

ZXONM E300 (V3.18) Operation Manual (Volume II)

270 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Table 50 RSEA Board Property Parameters....................................................90 Table 51 MPLS Ethernet Service Boards......................................................100 Table 52 Properties of MSE Board ..............................................................102 Table 53 Parameters and Configuration Principles ........................................104 Table 54 Parameters and Configuration Principles of MPLS port (MSE Board) ...105 Table 55 Configurations of Loop Check page ...............................................107 Table 56 Parameter Descriptions of VCG Port Capacity..................................108 Table 57 Parameter Descriptions of Establishing LSP (MSE Board) ..................112 Table 58 Parameter Descriptions of Establishing New LSP (MSE Board) ...........113 Table 59 Path Group Configuration Requirements ........................................127 Table 60 Requirements of LCAS Configuration .............................................128 Table 61 Connection Configuration of NE K and NE L ....................................130 Table 62 VLAN Configuration Requirements.................................................131 Table 63 Timeslot Configuration of NE K .....................................................132 Table 64 Timeslot Configuration of NE L .....................................................132 Table 65 ATM Cards.................................................................................133 Table 66 ATM Attributes List .....................................................................134 Table 67 Parameter Descriptions in Timer Set Dialog Box of ATM Board ..........136 Table 68 ATM Service Requirements ..........................................................138 Table 69 Connection Configuration ............................................................141 Table 70 Flow Configuration Requirements..................................................142 Table 71 TTP Configuration Requirements...................................................142 Table 72 DCC Use Configuration.................................................................149 Table 73 Static Route Information .............................................................152 Table 74 Parameter Descriptions of Setting Gateway NE ...............................156 Table 75 Parameter Descriptions of Configuring Static Router for NE6 and NE9 156 Table 76 Connection Relationships.............................................................158 Table 77 Connection Configuration (NE7)....................................................159 Table 78 Connection Configuration (NE12)..................................................161 Table 79 Query Types of SDH NEs .............................................................210 Table 80 Performance Task Parameter Setting.............................................213 Table 81 Relations between Loopback Points and Cards ................................220 Table 82 Setting Loopback Parameters .......................................................221 Table 83 Relations between Alarm Insertion Points and Cards........................222 Table 84 Setting Parameters for Inserting an Alarm .....................................223 Table 85 Bit Error Types...........................................................................224 Table 86 Relation between Insertion Points and Cards ..................................224 Table 87 Setting Parameters for Inserting a Bit Error....................................225 Table 88 Meanings of APS Parameters........................................................227 Table 89 CS Card Forced State Commands .................................................230 Table 90 Cards and Ports Supporting Port Mirror..........................................238 Table 91 Current Alarm PSE Report List......................................................255 Table 92 Reports of History Alarm Performance PSE.....................................256 Table 93 Net Path Reports ........................................................................257